新人教版初三英语全册知识点归纳及习题+人教版初三英语上册知识点总结

新人教版初三英语全册知识点归纳及习题+人教版初三英语上册知识点总结

新人教版初三英语全册知识点 归纳及习题+人教版初三英语上册知识点总结 ‎ 新人教版九年级英语全册知识点归纳及习题（最新）‎ Unit 1 How can we become good learners?‎ 短语总结: ‎ ‎1. good learners 优秀的学习者 2. work with friends 和朋友一起学习 ‎3. study for a test 备考 4.have conversations with 与……交谈 ‎5.speaking skills 口语技巧 6.a little 有点儿 ‎7.at first 起初 起先 8.the secret to......， .......的秘诀 ‎9.because of 因为 10.as well 也 ‎11.look up (在词典中等)查阅；抬头看 12.so that 以便，为了 ‎13.the meaning of ……的意思 14.make mistakes 犯错误 ‎15.talk to 交谈 16.depend on 依靠 依赖 ‎17.in common 共有的 18.pay attention to 注意 关注 ‎19.connect ……with ……把……联系。 20.for example 例如 ‎21.think about 考虑 22.even if 即使 尽管 纵容 ‎23.look for 寻找 24.worry about 担心 担忧 ‎25.make word cards 制作单词卡片 26.ask the teacher for help 向老师求助 ‎27.read aloud 大声读 28.spoken english 英语口语 ‎29.give a report 作报告 30.word by word 一字一字地 ‎31.so……that 如此……以至于 32.fall in love with 爱上 ‎33.something interesting 有趣的事情 34.take notes 记笔记 ‎35.how often 多久一次 36.a lot of 许多 ‎37.the ability to do sth. 做某事的能力 38.learning habits 学习习惯 ‎39.be interested in 对……感兴趣 40.get bored 感到无聊 ‎41.be good at 在……方面擅长 42.be afraid of 害怕 ‎43.each other 彼此 互相 44.instead of 代替 而不是 二.用法集萃 ‎1. by doing sth 通过做某事 2.it +be+adj+to do sth 做某事是……的 ‎3.finish doing sth 完成某事 4.what about doing sth？做某事怎么样？‎ ‎5.try to do sth 尽力做某事 6.the +比较近，the+比较近 越……，就越……‎ ‎7.find it+adj+to do sth 发现做某事 8.be afraid of doing sth 害怕做某事 ‎9.help sb (to) do sth 帮助某人做某事 10.practice doing sth 练习做某事 ‎11.keep doing sth 一直做某事 12.be afraid to do sth 害怕做某事 ‎13.begin to do sth 开始做某事 14.want to do sth 想要做某事 ‎15.need to do sth 需要做某事 16.remember to do sth 记得做某事 ‎17.shoot 射（射着，射死等表结果） 18.shoot at（ 瞄准） 射 Unit 2 I think that mooncakes are delicious!‎ 一．短语归纳 ‎1.put on 增加（体重）发胖 2.care about 关心 在乎 ‎3.end up 最终成为， 最后处于 4.not only ……but also……不但……而且…… 5.shoot down 射下 6.used to do 过去常常做……‎ ‎7.remind sb. of 使某人想起 8.give out 分发 发放 ‎9.the water festival 泼水节 10.the Chinese spring festival 中国春节 ‎11.next year 明年 12.sound like 听起来像 ‎13.each other 互相 彼此 14.in the shape of 以……的形状 ‎15.on mid-autumn night 在中秋之夜 16.fly up to 飞向 ‎17.lay out 摆开 布置 18.come back 回来 ‎19.as a result 结果 因此 20.mother’s day 母亲节 ‎21.more and more popular 越来越受欢迎 22.think of 想起 认为 思考 ‎23.dress up 装扮 穿上盛装 24.the importance of ……的重要性 ‎25.make money 挣钱 26.in need 需要帮助 处于困境中 ‎27.between ……and…… 在……和……之间 28.the dragon boat festival 龙舟节 ‎29.the lantern festival 元宵节 30.like best 最喜欢 ‎31.go to ……for a vacation 去……度假 32.be similar to 与……相似 ‎33.wash away 冲走 洗掉 34.mid-autumn festival 中秋节 ‎35.shoot down 射下 36.call out 大声呼喊 ‎37.the tradition of ……的传统 38.at night 在夜里 在晚上 ‎39.one……，the other……一个……，另一个… 40.Father’s day 父亲节 ‎41.have to 必须 不得不 42.play a trick on sb 捉弄某人 ‎43.the spirit of ……的精神 44.care about 关心 ‎45.wake up 醒来 46.the beginning of ……的开始 二．用法集萃 1. 感叹句式一：What+（a/an） +adj+名词（+主语+谓语+其他）！ 多么……的……‎ ‎ 感叹句式二：How +adj/adv+主语+谓语+其他！ ……多么……！‎ ‎2.in+时间段 在……后 ‎3.give sb. sth. 给某人某物 4.plan to do sth 计划做某事 ‎5.refuse to do sth 拒绝做某事 6.one of +名词复数形式……之一 ‎7.it +is+名词+动词不定式（to do sth）做某事是… 8.what …think of…？认为…怎么样？‎ ‎9.make sb do sth 让某人做某事 10.used to be 过去是……‎ ‎11.warn sb（not） to do sth告诫某人做某事 12.tell sb（not）to do sth 告诉某人做某事 ‎13.decide to do sth 决定 做某事 14.promise to do sth 承诺、答应做某事 三．语法全解 ‎1.宾语从句 ‎ 一．连词 a.陈述语序(that) b.一般疑问句(if 或whether) c.特殊疑问句(5w,1h)二．陈述语序 三.时态 可跟that从句做宾语的动词：say, think, insist, wish, hope, demand, imagine, wonder, know, see, believe, agree, admit, deny, expect, explain, order, command, feel, dream, suggest, hear, mean, notice, prefer, request, require, propose, declare, report等 例：I don’t know what they are looking for. ‎ Could you tell me when the train will leave?‎ 注意：当主句谓语动词是 think, believe, suppose, expect 等词，而宾语从句的意思是否定时，常把至主句表示。‎ 例： it is right for him to treat you like that.‎ 注意：由whether,if 引导的宾语从句 由whether(if)引导的宾语从句，实际上是一般疑问句演变而来的,意思是“是否”。‎ 例：I wonder whether(if) they will come to our party. ‎ 注意：当宾语从句表示的是一个客观真理或者事实时，即使主句是过去时，从句也用一般现在时态。‎ ‎ 例：The teacher told us that light travels faster than sound. ‎ ‎2.感叹句结构（P56） ‎ How+adj. /adv. + 主 + 谓！ What (a/an)+名+ 主 + 谓！‎ 例：What an interesting story it is! How tall Yao Ming is!‎ 练习 a. 将下列句子改为感叹句 It’s a nice dress. They are lovely animals. ‎ It’s bad weather. Her son is very naughty She is a very careful student. ‎ 第二单元检测 一. 单项选择 ‎1.___________exciting news!‎ ‎ A. What B. What an C. How D. How an ‎2. Do you know _________there will be a soccer match on CCTV5 tonight?‎ ‎ A. that B. if C. where D. when ‎3. She wondered ________I liked best about Mid-Autumn Festival?‎ ‎ A. that B. whether C. if D. what ‎4. Chang’e refused _________the magic medicine to Feng Meng.‎ ‎ A. to give B. gave C. giving D. give ‎5. — It’s dangerous to swim in this river.‎ ‎ — Yes, you are right. The government has 　　　　 people not to swim in it.‎ ‎ A. trained B. warned C. led D. encouraged ‎6. .I’ve five pounds because I ate too much meat.‎ ‎ A.put up B.put off C.put away D.put on ‎7. — Linda, do Chinese people celebrate　　 Easter Day?‎ ‎— No. This is the first time I’ve celebrated 　　 festival.  ‎ A. the; the B. the; a   C. /; the D. /; a ‎8. — What did you do on April Fool’s Day?— I played a trick 　　 my friends.‎ ‎       A. on  B. to C. with D. at ‎9. —Do you know if Jimmy 　　　　 to the party?‎ ‎ —I am not sure. But if he 　　　　, I will give him a big surprise.‎ ‎ A. comes; will come B. will come; will come C. comes; comes D. will come; comes ‎10 —Why do you call these cakes mooncakes?‎ ‎ —Can’t you see? They are in the 　　　　 of the moon.‎ ‎ A. size B. shape C. weight D. taste ‎11. —　　　　 we have! There is dragon dance in the park. —Sounds great. We can’t miss it.‎ ‎ A. What good luck B. How good luck C. What a good luck D. How a good luck ‎12. Jenny keeps two pets. One is a dog, _________is a rabbit.‎ ‎ A. another B. an other C. the other D. other ‎13. Chang’e refused _________the magic medicine to Feng Meng.‎ ‎ A. to give B. gave C. giving D. give ‎14. ---He dressed up ________a ghost last night. How scary!‎ ‎ ---Take it easy! He just played a trick ________us.‎ ‎ A. in, on B. in, in C. as, on D. as, in ‎15. — Can we visit Hong Kong this summer holiday?‎ ‎ — I wonder 　　　　 it is the best time to go there.‎ ‎ A. if B. when C. what D. how ‎.16 — I am going back to America for Thanksgiving Day. ‎ ‎ — 　　　　. And we will miss you.‎ ‎ A. Enjoy yourself B. You’re welcome C. That’s interesting D. The same to you ‎17.Halloween is a popular festival North America and it’s October 31st.‎ A.in,on B.in,in C.on, on D.on, in ‎18.— are you going to Chiang Mai? —In two weeks.‎ A.How long B.How soon C.How often D.When ‎19.Chinese people eat mooncakes Mid-autumn nights.‎ A.in B.on C.of D.at ‎20. he Chang’e to come back!‎ A.How,hoped B.What,hoped C.How,wished D.What, wished 二、用所给单词适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. Linda’s brother often (wear) a shirt and a tie at work.‎ ‎2. The old man 　　　　 (lay) out a newspaper on the bench and sat down on it.‎ ‎3. My dog usually barks when it sees a 　　　　 (strange) walk past.‎ ‎4. Bad luck! A thief 　　　　 (steal) my wallet on the bus this morning.‎ ‎5. Chinese people often show their hospitality (殷勤招待) by 　　　　 (treat) their friends.‎ ‎6.I believe that April is the (hot) month of the year.‎ ‎7.A Christmas Carol is a famous short novel (write) by Charles Dickens.‎ ‎8.I found a boy (lie) on the road when I went by.‎ ‎9.He was _______________(lay) his backpack when his mother came in.‎ ‎10.The girl refuses ________________(go) home now.‎ ‎11.I enjoy _______________(read) articles by Lu Xun.‎ ‎12.Linda said the moon_______________(travel) round the earth.‎ ‎13.Catherine said that she _______________(go) to Guangzhou.‎ ‎14. We are sure that he ________ (go) to school tomorrow.‎ ‎15. Could you tell me where the post office ______ (is)?‎ ‎16. Our father said that he _______ (will) buy a new computer.‎ ‎17. I hear that he _______ (swim) in the sea yesterday.‎ ‎18. The little boy tells us where his father _______ (work).‎ ‎19．He puts five ________ (pound) into the bottle every day.‎ ‎21．He tried his best ________ (answer) my questions.‎ ‎22．People started the tradition of ________ (admire)the moon since then.‎ ‎23．I plan ________ (travel) during the summer holiday.‎ ‎24．________ (mother) Day is on the second Sunday of May.‎ ‎25．I have many ways________ (solve) this problem.‎ ‎26．They spend two days ________ (do) this task.‎ ‎27．It is a good idea ________ (memorize) the poem.‎ ‎28We can get ________ (warm) from the sun.‎ ‎29．I warn him not ________ (play) on the road. ‎ ‎30．I decide ________ (keep) reading English every morning.‎ 三. 按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. I had a wonderful time at the party. (改为感叹句)‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 I had at the party!‎ ‎2. This idea sounds so amazing. (改为感叹句)‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 this idea sounds!‎ ‎3. “The parade will be the best part of the trip,” said Jim. (改为含有宾语从句的复合句)‎ ‎ Jim said 　　　　 the parade 　　　　 be the best part of the trip.‎ ‎4. “Are you sure of the time?” James asked me. (改为含有宾语从句的复合句)‎ ‎ James asked me 　　　　 I 　　　　 sure of the time.‎ ‎5. Our teacher said to us, “Light travels faster than sound.” (改为含有宾语从句的复合句)‎ ‎ Our teacher told us 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 than sound.‎ ‎6. These flowers are from Guangdong. He said.‎ He said ___________ these flowers ______________ from Guangdong.‎ ‎7. Light travels faster than sound. My teacher told me.‎ My teacher told me ___________ light __________ faster than sound.‎ ‎8. Can they speak French? I want to know.‎ I want to know _________ __________ ___________ ___________ French.‎ 四. 根据句意，（一）用所给单词或短语的适当形式填空。‎ ‎（warm, , punish, dress up as ，think of, care about,, wake up, remind... of）‎ ‎1. This Halloween, I will 　 Snow White.‎ ‎2. When my parents called me from my hometown, I could feel the 　 over the telephone.‎ ‎3. When I failed my exams, my parents usually encouraged me instead of 　 me.‎ ‎4. Our parents us most in the world.‎ ‎5. The music made me 　　 　　 my happy childhood.‎ ‎6. If you go to the photo exhibition (展览), the photos will 　　　　 you 　　　　 the earthquake on May 12, 2008.‎ ‎7. Jenny usually 　　　　 at 5 o’clock in the morning.‎ ‎(二)选词填空。surprised, interest , wanted, were, more, returned, thought, finished, stopped ‎"You will have a beautiful trip," the driver told me. The bus, he said, did not go straight to the beach. It went through some of the__1__places of the city. "Fine," I__2__.‎ It was still too early to get to the beach.I__3__to know why the bus left early at eight in the morning and__4__at four in the afternoon. I was_5___that the bus was full. All the people on the bus__6__women.And they all seemed to know each other. "They must go to the beach together often, "I thought.‎ The bus__7__several times to let people off. Wasn't any of them going all the way to the beach? The bus drove on, and more and__8__people got off. Ithen realized that the bus was the service bus for workers in those places of interest. It took them to their workplaces in the morning and took them back to the city after they__9__their work there. In the end the bus arrived at the beach.I got off, but I was the only one at the beach. ‎ ‎（三）用所给单词填空，使短文完整正确(每个单词限用一次)。 ‎ ‎(may, place, when, how, jumped, smiled, them, knowing, easy, lost)‎ One day, some people set out to sea by ship. One of (1)　　　　 took his pet monkey with him. (2)　　　　 they were far out at sea, their ship was broken for some reason and everyone fell into the sea, including (包括) the monkey. The monkey was sure that he would (3)　　　　 his life because he couldn’t swim. Suddenly a dolphin came and put him on her back. They soon got to an island and then the monkey (4)　　　　 down from the dolphin’s back.‎ The dolphin asked the monkey, “Do you know this (5)　　　　?”‎ The monkey answered, “Yes, I do. The king of this island is my father. Don’t you know that I am a prince?”‎ ‎ (6)　　　　 that no one had ever lived on the island, the dolphin said, “Well, you (7)　　　　 be a prince, but now you can be a king!”‎ The monkey then asked, “(8)　　　　 can I be a king?”‎ The dolphin (9)　　　　 and answered, “That’s (10)　　　　. As you are the only creature (生物) on this island, you will naturally be the king!” And then she swam away, leaving the monkey alone. ‎ The story tells us that those who lie (撒谎) may end up in trouble. ‎ 七、任务型阅读 ‎ When I was 5 years old, I went to the USA with my mom. I can still remember the first Halloween holiday I had in the USA.‎ On the morning of Halloween(万圣节), we paid a visit to a pumpkin farm. Each of us brought a pumpkin to school with us. I used the pumpkin to make a lantern which had two triangle eyes and a scary mouth. ‎ In the afternoon, we put on the Halloween costumes and went on parade in school. Some of the costumes were nice, but some of them looked scary. I chose to wear a suit of Superman’s clothes. ‎ I did a lot of things that day, but the part I liked best was “trick or treat” in the evening. (1)After dinner, I went outside with an empty bag. I hoped to get a lot of candies from people. At first, I was a bit nervous, so when I knocked at the door, my heart was beating very fast. A lady came out, and I said carefully to her, “Trick or treat.” My voice was very low, and even myself could hardly hear it. To my surprise, the lady was so kind to give me two candy bars, and I was so excited, thanked the lady and moved on. I couldn’t remember how many houses I visited, but I could remember how many candies I got—I got 91 pieces of candy that day, and （2）我以自己而感到自豪.‎ What a happy Halloween I had! And I wish we could have a Halloween every month!‎ 根据短文内容，完成下列任务：‎ ‎1.把划线部分翻译成汉语：1. ‎ ‎2.把所给汉语翻译成英语：2. ‎ ‎ 根据短文内容，回答下列问题：‎ ‎3.How any pieces of candy did the writer got from the people thst dsy?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎4.How many Halloweens did the writer wish to have one year?‎ ‎5.给短文命个恰当的题目：‎ ‎ ‎ unit3 Could you please tell me where the restaurants are?‎ 一．短语归纳 ‎1.a pair of 一对，一双，一副 2.between A and B在a和b之间 ‎3.on one’s / the way to 在去……的路上 4.pardon me 什么，请再说一遍 ‎5.pass by 路过 经过 6.look forward to 盼望 期待 ‎7.excuse me 打扰了 请原谅 8.get some magazines 得到一些杂志 ‎9.get some information about 获取有关……的一些信息10.turn leftright 向左向右 转 ‎11.go past 经过 路过 12.a little earlier 早一点儿 ‎13.a good place to eat 一个吃饭的好地方 14.in different situation 在不同的情况下 ‎15.on time 准时 按时 16.get to 到达 ‎17.have dinner 吃晚餐 18.on one’s / the right在右边 ‎19.come on 快点 请过来 20.the shopping center 购物中心 ‎21.the corner of....... 的角落/拐角处 22.lead into 导入 引入 二.用法集萃 ‎1．not ……· until……直到……猜…… You never know until you try something.‎ ‎2.let’s do sth 咱们做某事吧！‎ ‎3.spend time doing sth 话费时间做某事 4.thank sb for doing sth 为做某事而感谢某 ‎5.would like to do sth 想要做某事 6.look forward to doing sth 盼望做某事 ‎7. It seems (that)…‎ It seems a rock band plays there every evening.‎ ‎8. Could you please tell me... ?‎ Could you please tell me how to get to the post office?‎ ‎9.take的用法 ‎① take some food take some medicine （=have吃，喝） ② take notes做笔记 ③ take one’s temperature ( 测量 ）‎ ‎④ It takes sb some time/money to do something （ 花费，需要 ）‎ ‎⑤ I’ll take this coat.（=buy购买）‎ ‎⑥ take somebody / something to （ 带领，拿去，取 ）‎ ‎⑦take a train to Chongqing （ 乘坐 ） ⑧ take off（ 脱下）‎ ‎10.turn 的用法 turn to page 80 翻到 It is your turn.轮到你了。‎ at the turning 在转弯处 turn on/ off/ up/ down 关 turn right/ left at the first turning /crossing 第三单元检测 一．单项选择 ‎1. — Does my question sound 　　　　 enough?‎ ‎ — I don’t think so. You can ask more 　　　　 by using “could” instead of “can”. ‎ ‎ A. politely; politely B. politely; polite C. polite; politely D. polite; polite ‎2. It’s not enough 　an English club. ‎ ‎ A. join B. to join C. joining D. to joining ‎3. — You really went to the park last weekend? ‎ ‎— Yes, I 　　　　 go there. Look! This is a photo of me in the park.‎ ‎ A. will B. would C. do D. did ‎4. — I don’t know 　　　　 next. — Let’s ask our teacher for help.‎ ‎ A. what to do B. what should I do C. how to do ‎ ‎5. — Would you like to go to the forest park or the water park?‎ ‎— Oh, it’s hard to choose. 　　　 are my favorites.‎ ‎ A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. All ‎6. — I wonder 　　　 we’ll go to the Children’s Park this weekend.‎ ‎— We can go there by bus. A. how B. when C. where D. if ‎7. Could you please tell me 　　　?‎ ‎ A. where is the nearest library B. where the nearest library is ‎ C. where is the nearest bookstore D. where the nearest bookstore is ‎8. What did you say just now? — I asked her 　　　　.‎ ‎ A. where is the hotel B. where the hotel is ‎ C. where was the hotel D. where the hotel was ‎9. — I am worried about the coming speech. I don’t even know 　　　　.‎ ‎ — What about singing a song?‎ ‎ A. how I can start with B. what I can start with ‎ C. how should I start with D. what should I start with ‎10.Tom never went to bed he finished his homework last night.‎ A.because B.if C.until D.while ‎11.On my way home,I pass a fruit shop every day.‎ A.to,by B.to,past C., by D.of, for ‎12.I miss my grandparents very much. I’m seeing them again.‎ A.looking for B.looking after C.looking forward D.looking forward to ‎13.It’s always busy, so come earlier to get a table.‎ ‎ A.a bit of B.a little C.very D.more ‎14.The bookstore is your right,beside the bank.‎ ‎ A.in B.at C.on D.of ‎15.The expressions they use might whom they are speaking to or how well they know each other.‎ ‎ A.instead of B.lead in to C.because of D.depend on ‎16. — The game is too hard for me. I will certainly lose.‎ ‎ — You never say no before you try.‎ A. Forget it! B. I’m sorry. C. Come on! D. Pardon me?‎ ‎17.Students should learn how ________ problems.‎ A．solve B．solving C．can solve D．to solve 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1.I’ looking forward to (see) you again.‎ ‎2.Would you like (go)to a ovie with us tonight?‎ ‎3.We should speak to the old (polite).‎ ‎4.I don’t know how long he spent (drive) a car to shanghai yesterday.‎ ‎5.Thank you very much for (tell) e the truth.‎ ‎6.He drove his car in the (derect) of Beijing.‎ ‎7.It’s sunny today, let him (go) swimming.‎ ‎8.She is an (Italy) singer.‎ ‎9．The flower is ________ (迷人的) at night.‎ ‎10．It is ________ (方便的) to go shopping in this area.‎ ‎11．Please speak________ (礼貌地) to the old people.‎ ‎12．I have enough time ________ (go) to school by bike.‎ ‎13．Could you tell me how ________ (go) home? ‎ ‎14．It's ________ (polite) to speak loudly in public.‎ ‎15．There are few people in the street.It's ________ (crowded) at all.‎ ‎16．I would like ________ (make) a postcard.‎ ‎17．He is ________ (wonder) if he will go to the Summer Place.‎ ‎18．Would you mind ________ (open) the door?‎ ‎19．Could you tell me where the restrooms ________ (be)?‎ ‎20．I am ________ (excite) to go swimming.‎ ‎21．You don't need ________ (go) to school.‎ ‎22．If it doesn't rain tomorrow, we ________ (have) a party.‎ ‎23．The restaurant is always busy, so come a little ________ (early) to get a table.‎ 三将下列简单句合并为复合句 ‎1．Where is my Chbook? I don't know ‎.I don't know ______ my Chinese book ____．‎ ‎2．She studieantian Middle School. Jane says. ‎ ‎ Jane says ______ ________ in Lantian Middle School.‎ ‎3．Do ydy French? Could you tell me? ‎ ‎ Could you tell me ____ ______ ________ French?‎ ‎4．Was first to come here? Please tell me. ‎ ‎ Please tell me ____ ____ ______ the first to come here.‎ ‎5．The earth goes around the sun. The teacher told the students.‎ The teacher he students ______ the earth ______ around the sun. ‎ 四 A. 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎（such as, ask about, lead in, parking lot, look forward to address walk up, speak）‎ ‎1. People in the west don’t like to 　　　　 ladies’ ages.‎ ‎2. I am interested in many Hollywood animations (卡通影片), 　　　　 Up and Frozen. ‎ ‎3. I your reply soon.‎ ‎4. There is not a 　　　　 near the cinema, so we’d better take a bus instead of driving there.‎ ‎5. By 　　　　 to a request with a question, you can make others feel more comfortable.‎ ‎6. Look! The policeman is 　 to us.‎ ‎7 There will be a speech in the hall. The 　 is a famous scientist.‎ ‎8.Would you please tell me your e-mail 　 ‎ B根据短文意思，用方框中所给词语填空，使文章通顺、完整 at, hardly, changed, before, win, happens, down, chose, practiced ,‎ ‎ part Life is not easy, so I’d like to say “When anything (1) , believe in yourself!” When I was a young boy, I was too shy to speak to anyone. My classmates often laughed (2) me. I was sad but could do nothing. Later, something happened, and it (3) my life. It was an English speech contest. My mother asked me to take (4) in it. What a terrible idea! It meant I had to speak (5) all the teachers and students of my school!‎ ‎“Come on, boy. Believe in yourself! You are sure to (6) .” Then mother and I talked about many different topics（主题）. At last I (7) the topic “Believe in yourself”. I tried my best to remember all the speech and (8) it over 100 times. With my mother’s great love, I did well in the contest. I could (9)___________ believe my ears when the news came that I had won the first place. I heard the cheers (欢呼声)from the teachers and students. Those classmates who once looked (10)__________ on me, now all said congratulations to me 五、信息归纳。‎ A boy and his father went walking in the mountains.Suddenly the boy fell, hurt himself, and cried, “AAAhhhhhhhh！！！” To his surprise, he heard the voice repeating, somewhere in the mountain, “AAAhhhhhhhh！！！” Then the boy shouted, “Who are you？” He received the answer, “Who are you？” He got angry at the answer, so he shouted, “Foolish！” He received the answer, “Foolish！”‎ He looked at his father and asked, “What's going on？” The father smiled and said, “My ‎ son, listen，” And then he shouted to mountain, “I love you！” The voice answered, “I love you！” Again the man cried, “You are the best！” The voice answered, “You are the best！”‎ The boy was surprised, but did not understand.Then the father explained (解释), “People call this Echo, but really this is life.It gives you back everything you say or do.Our life is just a reflection (反映) of what we have done.If you want more love in the world, have more love in your heart.If you want to be successful, work hard.This can be used in everything in life.Life will give you back everything you have given to it.”‎ Information Card What the boy and his father did in the mountain They 1.____________ in it.‎ How the boy felt when he heard the answer He was 2.__________.‎ How many times the father shouted to the mountain ‎3.________________ times.‎ What people call the phenomenon (现象)‎ ‎4.________________.‎ What can we get from the passage？‎ Life will give back everything you 5.________________.‎ 六. 书面表达 （共1题，计20分）‎ 假设你是Lucy，国庆节期间你将和父母去某城市旅游。你从网上获得了Sunshine ‎ Hotel的部分信息。请你写一封电子邮件给该宾馆的经理，介绍你的行程并咨询如下相关细节：‎ ‎1. How far is the hotel from the airport? ‎ ‎2. How can you get to the hotel? ‎ ‎3. Do they offer free breakfast? ‎ ‎4. Is there a discount (折扣) for a long stay?‎ 要求：‎ ‎1. 覆盖要点，请补充合理的细节； 2. 80词左右，开头和结尾已给出，不计入总词数。‎ Dear Sir, ‎ My family is planning a holiday to your city. I got some information about your hotel, but I still have some questions to ask. Would you be kind enough to reply to my e-mail?‎ Dear Sir, ‎ My family is planning a holiday to your city. I got some information about your hotel, but I still have some questions to ask. Would you be kind enough to reply to my e-mail?‎ We are arriving in your city on October 1st. And we plan to stay in your hotel for 5 days. Would you tell me how far your hotel is from the airport? And we’d like to know how we can get to your hotel. Also, we wonder whether you offer free breakfast. Last but not least, would you mind telling us whether there is a discount for a long stay? ‎ Thanks for your time. I’m looking forward to your reply. ‎ unit 4 I used to be afraid of the dark.‎ 一．短语归纳 ‎1.used to do 过去常常做 2.deal with 对付 应付 ‎3.be proud of 为……骄傲 ，感到自豪 4.take pride in 为……感到自豪 ‎5.from time to time 时常，有时 6.in public 公开地 ‎7.in person 亲身，亲自 8.take up sth 开始做，接受，占用 ‎9.not……anymore 不再 10.worry about 为……担忧 ‎11.hang out 闲逛 12.think about 考虑 ‎13.be alone 独处 14.on the soccer team 在足球队 ‎15.no longer 不再 16.make a decision 做决 定 ‎17.to one’s surprise 令某人吃惊的是 18.even though 尽管 ‎19.pay attention to 对……注意，留心 20.in the last few years 在过去的几年里 ‎21.be afraid of 害怕 22.turn red 变红 ‎23.tons of attention 很多关注 24．be careful 当心 ‎25.give up 放弃 26.a very small number of …极少数的……‎ ‎27.give a speech 作演讲 28.all the time 一直 总是 ‎29.be interested in 对……感兴趣 30.change one’s life 改变某人的生活 ‎31.take care of 照顾 32.one of……,……之一 二．用法集萃 ‎1.used to do sth 过去常常做某 .2.be afraid of doing sth 害怕做某事 ‎3.have to do sth 必须做某事 4.make sb do sth 让某人做某事 ‎5.give up doing sth 放弃做什么 6.try to do sth 尽力做某事 ‎7.adj+ enough to do sth 足够…而能够做某事 8.be prepared to do sth 准备做某事 ‎9.see sb doing sth 看见某人在做某事 10.begin to so sth 开始做某事 ‎11require sb to do sth 要求某人做某事 12.decide to do 决定做某事 ‎13.make a decision to do sth 决定做某事 14.It’s hard to believe that …很难相信……‎ ‎15.It +has+been +一段时间+ since+从句 自从……以来已经有很多 长时间了 ‎16.dare to do sth 敢于做某事 17.It’s adj+ for sb+ to do sth对某人来说做某18.take up doing sth 开始做某事 三．语法全解 ‎1. 辨析： ‎ ‎ used to do sth. 过去常常做…‎ get/be used to sth./doing sth. 习惯于…‎ ‎ 　 be used to do 　被用于做…（被动语态）‎ ‎ be used by 由(被)…使用（被动语态）‎ be used as … 被当做…使用（被动语态）‎ be used for doing　被用于做…（被动语态）‎ 例: I used to go to work by bus. Now I take a taxi. ‎ He used to be a problem boy. She used to be very shy. ‎ I’m used to drinking a cup of water after meal.‎ He’s been used to living in the dormitory.‎ A hammer is used to drive nails. ‎ This machine is used to clean the floor.‎ The girl is being used as a servant in the house. ‎ A knife can be used for cutting bread. ‎ ‎2) afford（支付得起）的用法 ‎ afford sth 买得起…… afford to do sth 有足够的…去做…‎ 例：His mother couldn’t afford to pay for her child’s education.‎ They did not consider whether they could afford the time or not.‎ We can’t afford to pay such a price. （such和so区别见P110）‎ ‎3) take pride in sth/ sb = be proud of sth/ sb 为…感到自豪 例：He was watching me and take pride in everything good I do. ‎ I take pride in my child. =I’m proud of my child.‎ 注：He take pride in everything good I do. 这是一个定语从句。省略了关系代词that ‎。先行词为不定代词时，关系代词只能用that。‎ ‎4）the+序数词+最高级+N 第几（大/长/高…）‎ One of the/形容词性物主代词+Ns 谓语用三单 例：He is now one of the best students in his class One of my best friends is a doctor. ‎ One of his most expensive pens has been lost.‎ The yellow river is the second largest river in china.‎ Mount Qomolangma is the first highest mountain around the world 第四单元检测 一单项选择 ‎1. — Only a small number of students 　　　　 able to pass the exam.‎ ‎ — Yes. The number 　　　　 no more than 20.‎ A. is; is B. are; is C. is; are D. are; are ‎2.—Mike , you’ve got so many beautiful stamps . ‎ ‎ —Yeah. I collect stamps when I was 8 years old .‎ ‎ A was used to B used to C am used to D used ‎ ‎3.Our hometown a lot in the last few years . ‎ ‎ A changed B has changed C is changing D changes ‎ ‎4.Zhang Lin used to in the daytime , but now he is used to at night .‎ ‎ A read , read B reading , read C read , reading D reading , reading ‎ ‎5.Every year a lot of tourists travel to Hainan , because it’s island . ‎ ‎ A so a beautiful B so beautiful C such a beautiful D a such beautiful ‎ ‎6.There a swimming pool here . ‎ ‎ A used to have B was used to be C used to be D is used to having ‎ ‎7.I used to play soccer and I was the soccer team . ‎ ‎ A / , in B the , on C a , on D / , on ‎ ‎8.His teacher advised his parents with their son . ‎ ‎ A talk B talking C talked D to talk ‎ ‎9.— you take a bus to school ?—Yes . But now I usually walk to school . ‎ ‎ A Did , use to B Were , used to C Do , use t o D Do, used to ‎ ‎10.He won’t dare his promise .‎ ‎ A break B to break C breaking D breaks ‎ ‎11.I saw him to the shop with his cousin just now . ‎ ‎ A goes B go C to go D went ‎ ‎12.The dinning hall is to hold 300 people.‎ A.enough big B.enough small C.small enough D.big enough ‎（1）‎ ‎13.It’s been three years we last saw our primary school classmates.‎ ‎ A.since B.for C.until D.after ‎14.She is girl from Asia.‎ ‎ A.a 18-year-old B.an 18-year-old ‎ C.an 18-years-old D.a 18-years-old ‎15.—Many students don’t know how to difficulties and become worried.‎ ‎ —I think they should ask the teacher for help.‎ ‎ A.play with B.deal with C.talk with D.come up with ‎16.I didn’t use to be popular in school,but now I get attention everywhere I go.‎ ‎ A.tons of B.very C.much too D.a lot ‎17.Though he is at home,he doesn’t feel for he has many things to do.‎ ‎ A.alone,lonely B.lonely,alone C.alone,alone D.lonely,lonely ‎18.—Mom,I was the first to reach the top of the mountain.‎ ‎—Good job,Jack. I’m of you.‎ ‎ A.careful B.proud C.tired D.afraid ‎19.Lucy used to go to bed late, she?‎ ‎ A.didn’t B.doesn’t C.hadn’t D.isn’t ‎20. our surprise,the ground is covered with snow.‎ ‎ A.By B.To C.For D.In ‎21.We all take in Liu Yang,the great astronaut.‎ ‎ A.pride B.prides C.proud D.proudly ‎22.My brother is not old enough after himself.‎ ‎ A.look B.looking C.to look D.looked ‎23. — Baseball is a popular game among students in Taipei.‎ ‎ — Really? But it’s unpopular in our city. Students play it. ‎ ‎ A. often B. seldom C. usually D. always ‎24.However, attention can also be a bad thing.‎ A.too much B.much too C.too many D.many too ‎26.Our teacher advises us ________ a lot of books to improve our study.‎ A．to read B．reading C．reads D．read ‎27.They arrived ________ Shanghai ________ a cold morning.‎ A．in; in B．in; on C．at; on D．at; in ‎28 I don’t know 　　　　 to deal with them.— Calm down first. Let’s see what I can do for you.‎ ‎ A. what B. why C. who D. how ‎29. — Andy says his team will win the cup in the final.— I am sure they will 　　　　. ‎ ‎ A. pass it B. keep it C. catch it D. make it ‎30 — Do you often e-mail your friends?‎ ‎— No. I use WeChat more often, but I 　　　　 e-mail my friends.‎ ‎ A. have to B. would like to C. used to D. get to ‎31 — Look! The goldfish is dying.— What a pity! This kind of goldfish 　　　　 a lot of care and attention. A. has B. offers C. requires D. receives ‎ ‎（2）‎ ‎32. — James, can you tell me 　　　　?------. He used to be a shy and quiet boy.‎ ‎ A. what is Paul like B. what Paul is like C. what does Paul like D. what Paul likes ‎ 33 —Why do you work so hard?‎ ‎— Because I hope I can make my parents 　　　　 me. I don’t want to let them down. ‎ ‎ A. take pride in B. take care of C. be strict with D. be afraid of ‎34. — You should say sorry to your father for the mistake you made, Tom.‎ ‎ — I don’t 　　　　 to meet his eyes. What if he gets angry with me?‎ ‎ A. need B. have C. refuse D. dare ‎ ‎35. — This place used to be full of trees, 　　　　 it?— Yes. But now it has turned into buildings. A. did B. didn’t C. was D. wasn’t 二用所给单词的适当形式填空（8分）‎ ‎1.He got good on her exam . (score).‎ ‎2.It’s interesting how people have changed . (see)‎ ‎3.France is a country . (Europe)‎ ‎4.After his parents to Guangzhou , his life changed .(move)‎ ‎5.After that , he became more in history .(interest)‎ ‎6.I spent much time on the Internet . (chat)‎ ‎7.I used to ants and other insects when I was a child .(watch)‎ ‎8.These things are for my life . (help) ‎ ‎9．I didn't use________ (be) popular. ‎ ‎10．He enjoys ________ (listen) to the radio.‎ ‎11．I am afraid of ________ (go) out at night.‎ ‎12．To be healthy, we should eat a lot of ________ (vegetable)．‎ ‎13. Without hard work, it would be impossible for you 　　　　 (get) good grades in exams.‎ ‎14. The hotel is 　　　　(exact) what we want. It’s a perfect one for us to stay in.‎ ‎15 It’s high time that we made a 　　　　(decide). There is no need to discuss it anymore.‎ ‎16.She is not strong enough (go) walking up ountains.‎ ‎17.When I walked past the park,I saw some old pople (do) Chinese Kongfu.‎ ‎18.Don’t give up (study) hard. Because you are a good student.‎ ‎19.Finally,his parents made a decision (send) him to a boarding school.‎ ‎20.He has been working hard and is now one of (good) student in his class.‎ ‎21.My life (change) a lot in the last few years.‎ ‎22.At last, he made an important (decide).‎ ‎23.He didn’t dare (speak) in front of the people.‎ ‎24．He is able ________ (travel) in the countryside.‎ ‎25．He gave up ________ (drive)．‎ 三. 按要求完成句子。‎ ‎1. My parents often took a walk after supper in the past. (改写同义句)‎ ‎ My parents 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 a walk after supper.‎ ‎2. My uncle used to work in Sichuan. (改写成否定句)‎ ‎（3）‎ ‎ My uncle 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 work in Sichuan.‎ ‎3. 我以前经常开车上班，但是现在我骑车。(完成译句)‎ ‎ I 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 to work, but now I ride my bike.‎ ‎4. 朱迪不再是一个害羞的女孩了。‎ ‎ Judy is 　　　　 a shy girl 　　　　.‎ ‎5. 曹老师以前是不是教过历史？他历史知识真丰富。‎ ‎ 　　　　 Mr Cao 　　　　 　　　　 teach history? He has so much knowledge of history.‎ ‎3. 我开始从事培训志愿者工作已经一年了。‎ ‎ It has been a year since I 　　　　 　　　　 training volunteers.‎ ‎4. 当志愿者让我的私人时间变少了，但是我的时间花在更有意义的事情上了。‎ ‎ Being a volunteer makes me 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 time, but my time was spent on something more meaningful.‎ ‎5. 面对这么多困难，我们决定继续奋斗，而不是放弃。 ‎ Facing so many difficulties, we’ve decided to 　　　　 　　　　 instead of 　　　　 　　　　.‎ 四 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎（be proud of, be absent from, all the time, in person, take care of，Europe introduce give up）‎ ‎1. I am tired of working with numbers 　　　　　, so I give up my job as an accountant (会计).‎ ‎2. The kind lady spends a lot of free time 　　　　　　　　 homeless cats and dogs.‎ ‎3. I will not send the package byexpress (快递). I’ve decided to take it to Tom 　　　　　　　　.‎ ‎4. Both Jim and his cousin 　　　　　　　　 the party yesterday. What a pity!‎ ‎5. Every one of the club 　　　　　　　　 being a member of the great team.‎ ‎.6 I have never thought of 　 　 my dream. ‎ ‎7. At the meeting, Mr. Wang began with a short 　 　. ‎ ‎8. This country is not a 　 　 country, though some parts of it are in Europe.‎ 五、选词填空 ‎( using , How , photos , their , spend , bring ,But ,easily ,with, what , better , paying)‎ Ten years ago , few people had mobile phones. But now , most people have 1 own mobile phones . With a mobile phone people can make phone calls 2 .Our life has changed a lot because of it . Chatting and message exchanging help people get to know each other 3 . You can even take 4 and send them to friends far away . ‎ ‎（4）‎ ‎ 5 amazing ! And now we can do more and more things 6 it , such as playing games , getting and sending e-mails , surfing the Internet , or even 7 for what we buy . But there are some disadvantages . You have to pay the bill and it’s bad for your body if you keep 8 it for a long time . And for students , if they 9 too much time playing with it , they may not be able to study well . ‎ ‎ In a word , mobile phones play an important role in our daily life . It’s helpful and necessary . 10 people , especially students , should use them properly . ‎ ‎ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ‎ 六. 任务型阅读 （共5小题，计10分）‎ 阅读下面短文，根据短文内容完成下列各题。‎ If you had only 45 minutes to stay with your family a day, what would you do? Watching TV or eating? ‎ According to the latest survey about family life in Britain, many people probably do both at the same time. The results of the survey of 3,000 children and parents signal (暗示) a worrying problem: The family relationship is becoming worse. ‎ Some experts (专家) say that the problem is caused by a “family-unfriendly culture”. The results show that most families get together for only 45 minutes a day. And most of the time is spent either in front of the TV or eating. ‎ Sally Brown, a 15-year-old girl, said, “There are two girls in my family — my sister and I. Our parents never play with us and they don’t think they should do this. When we go outside and play with other children, our mother usually does housework or cooks. When our father gets back home, we have dinner together. And then we go out to play again after having helped wash the dishes. Our parents don’t always help us do anything we can — sometimes they even encourage us to do something difficult on our own. They think this is a much better way to educate children. In fact, we hope our parents can read to us before we go to bed. We hope to spend more time with them.”‎ ‎1. What do most British families do when they get together according to the latest survey?‎ ‎ They 　　 　　　 　　　 　.‎ ‎2. What causes the family relationship to become wrose according to some experts?‎ ‎ It is caused by a 　　 　　　 　　　 　. ‎ ‎3. What does the mother usually do when the two girls play with other children outside?‎ ‎ She usually 　　 　　　 　　　 　. ‎ ‎4. What do Sally’s parents think is a much better way to educate children?‎ ‎ Sally’s parents think 　　 　　　 　　　 　. ‎ ‎5. What do the two girls hope? （5）‎ ‎ They hope to 　　 　　　 　　　 　. ‎ 七. 书面表达 （共1题，计20分）‎ Mary在学校参加了一个Buddy Club, 从那以后，她改变了很多。请你结合下面所给的提示，写一篇英语短文。‎ In the past Now Personalities shy, quiet, get nervous easily brave, outgoing…‎ Hobbies reading ‎ reading, singing… ‎ Abilities good at dancing, singing…‎ ‎ ‎ 要求: ‎ ‎1. 覆盖要点，可以合理增加细节；‎ ‎2. 80词左右，开头与结尾已经给出，不计入总词数。‎ Joining a club sometimes changes a person greatly.‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 　‎ Joining a club sometimes changes a person greatly.‎ Mary used to be a shy and quiet girl. She used to get nervous easily and her face often turned red when she spoke with strangers. She liked reading in her free time. However, she has changed a lot since she joined the Buddy Club. Now, Mary is so brave and outgoing that she isn’t afraid of speaking in public anymore. What’s more, she has lots of hobbies, such as singing, writing and dancing. She is good at them as well. ‎ 从进入中学到现在，在你身上一定发生了不少变化。请写一篇文章描述一下你的变化。词数80个左右。（从相貌，性格 及爱好等方面来写）‎ ‎________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎________________________________________________________________________‎ 参考范文：‎ Since I was a midschool student, I I have changed a lot! For example,I used to be very short and fat, but I am tall and thin now. I also used to have long hair, but now my hair is short..I used to be very lazy.I didn't get up until being late for school.But now I get up very early for sports.I used to like playing football, but I like basketball now.‎ So during these years, I really have changed a lot!‎ unit5 What are the shirts made of ?‎ 一短语归纳 ‎1.be made of 由...制成的(表示制成成品后，仍可看出原材料是什么)‎ ‎2.be made from 由...制成的（在成品中已无法辨认原材料）‎ ‎3.be known for 以...闻名 4.be used for 被用于...‎ ‎5.no matter 不论；无论 6.be covered with 用...覆盖 ‎7.as far as i know 据我所知 8.by hand 用手 ‎9.be good for 对……有益 10.on the last friday of each month最后一个星期五 ‎11.be good at 擅长 12.make high-technology products 制造高科技产品 ‎13.the earth’s surface 地球表面 14.many different kinds of 许多不同种类的 ‎15.fly a kite 放风筝 16.such as 例如 ‎17.according to 根据 按照 18.ask for help 请求帮助 ‎19.a symbol of ……的象征 20.put……on…… 把……放在……上 ‎21.be used for 被用于做…… 22.good luck 好运 ‎23.at a very high heat 在高温下 24.be made in 在……制造的 ‎25.be famous for 以……著名 26.on the sides of mountains 在山腰上 ‎27.traffic accident 交通事故 28.a kite festival 风筝节 ‎29.be from 来自 30.turn ……into ……把……变成……‎ ‎31.send out 放出 32.in trouble 处于困境中 ‎33.rise into 上升 上涨 34.paper cutting 剪纸 ‎35.be used by 被……使用 36.during the spring festival 在春节期间 ‎37.sky lanterns 孔明灯 38.all over the world 全世界 二．用法集萃 1. no matter +what / when / where =whatever / whenever / wherever “无论什么/什么时候/哪里”‎ 2. it放在find / found 后做形式宾语的用法 3. It seems that +从句 “好像……” 4.buy sb.sth.=buy sth for sb 给某人买某物 ‎5.avoid doing sth 避免做某事 6.allow sb to do sth 允许某人做某事 ‎7.want to do sth 想做某事 8.learn to do sth 学会 做某事 ‎9.It takes + sb. +一段时间 + to do sth做某事花费某人多长时间10.try to do sth 尽力做某事 ‎10.辨析：be made of 由...制作/制造(材料)：在成品中能看出原材料 ‎ be made from由...制造/制成(材料)：在成品中看不出原材料 be made in在...制作/制造 (产地) Made in China.中国制造 例：The desk is made of wood. Bread is made of flour. ‎ ‎ The paper is made from wood. Wine is made of grapes.‎ ‎ This kind of plane is made in China.‎ ‎11. be famous for 以...闻名;为人知晓  be known for因...而闻名 ‎ be famous as作为...而闻名 be known as作为...而闻名 ‎ 例：Jingdezhen is famous for china.‎ China is famous for its tourism.‎ Mo Yan is very famous as a writer.‎ ‎12. allow sb to do sth允许某人做某事 allow doing sth ‎ be allowed to do sth 例：Please allow me to come in.‎ My boss doesn't allow me to use the telephone.‎ We were not allowed to talk in class. ‎ They allowed smoking in this room only.‎ 注意：allow只可搭配动名词短语作宾语，不可直接搭用动词不定式作宾补，即只可说allow doing sth，不可说allow to do sth.‎ ‎13.一般现在时的被动语态（见P155页）‎ ‎ 结构：am/is/are+过去分词 第五单元检测 一单项选择 ‎1. Our desks are made 　　　　 wood, and paper is made 　　　　 wood, too.‎ ‎ A. of; of B. from; from C. from; of D. of; from ‎2. — Have you heard of Weifang?— Yes, it 　　　　 kites.‎ ‎ A. is known for B. is used for C. is taken for D. is named for ‎3. — Do I have to do this thing now?‎ ‎— Yes, it 　　　　 that you don’t have much choice (选择的权利).‎ ‎ A. says B. looks C. seems D. thinks ‎4. — 　　　　 Chinese clay art, you should choose a very special kind of clay first.‎ ‎ — Yes. This kind of clay is easy to shape.A. Making B. Make C. To making D. To make ‎5. — 　　　　 paper cutting used during the Spring Festival?‎ ‎ — People usually put them on doors or windows.‎ ‎ A. Why did B. Why is C. How is D. How did ‎6. — Are the visitors all from 　　　　?— No, there are only 5 　　　　 in the group.‎ A. Germany; Germany B. Germany; Germans C. German; Germans D. German; Germany ‎7. — Our English teacher always keeps his lessons 　　　　. ‎ ‎ — That’s why he is so popular among his students.‎ ‎ A. lively B. happily C. freely D. friendly ‎8. In those days, bikes were not 　　　　 used because few people could afford to buy one.‎ ‎ A. quickly B. hardly C. widely D. nearly ‎9. When I asked her, she tried to avoid 　　　　 me.‎ ‎ A. answered B. answering C. answer D. to answer ‎10-. — The house prices in the city 　　　　 a lot last year.‎ ‎(1)‎ ‎ — That’s true. But houses don’t sell well this year.‎ ‎ A. rose B. are risen C. were risen D. would rise ‎11. — Mary, will you invite your friends to your birthday party?‎ ‎ — Yes, Mom. I have 　　　　 many invitations to my friends.‎ ‎ A. given away B. taken away C. worked out D. sent out ‎12. China has many special forms of traditional art, 　　　　 sky lanterns, paper cutting and Chinese clay art. A. such as B. instead of C. except for D. because of ‎13. I’ll finish the job, 　　　　 how long it takes.‎ ‎ A. until B. unless C. no matter D. even though ‎14. — Are Jiangsu and Zhejiang famous for silk?— I think so. 　　　　 I know, more than half of the silk in China is produced in Jiangsu and Zhejiang. ‎ ‎ A. As long as B. As far as C. As many as D. As little as ‎15. — Kate’s allowed to chat on WeChat with her friends at home, 　　　　 she?‎ ‎ — Yes. Her parents think she is old enough.‎ ‎ A. doesn’t B. isn’t C. does D. is ‎16. — Mom, is it OK for me to watch TV for a while?‎ ‎ — Sorry. Why not watch TV after your homework 　　　　?‎ ‎ A. completes B. completed C. has completed D. is completed ‎17. — An iPad is really a great thing. ‎ ‎ — I agree. However, 　　　　. Using iPads too much has a bad influence on us.‎ ‎ A. every dog has its day B. the grass is always greener on the other side ‎ C. no pains, no gains D. every coin has two sides ‎18. — Excuse me, sir. You 　　　　 to smoke here. Look at the sign “No smoking”.‎ ‎ — Sorry. I 　　　　 it.‎ ‎ A. aren’t allowed; wasn’t seen B. aren’t allowed; didn’t see ‎ C. don’t allow; wasn’t seen D. don’t allow; didn’t see ‎19.Pardon? I can hear you.‎ ‎ A.usually B.almost C.hardly D.nearly ‎ ‎ ‎20.When you are ________， I will help you.‎ A．in trouble B．in help C．with trouble D．in hope ‎21 The whole city is ________ fog.‎ A．cover with B．covered with C．cover D．covered ‎22.I've got several novels written by Mo Yan.You can borrow ________ if you like.‎ A．it B．one C．every D．either ‎23.Many trees and flowers ________ in our school every year and they make our school a beautiful ‎ garden.‎ A．have planted B．are planted C．were planted D．will be planted ‎24.—I think drinking milk every morning is good ________ our health.‎ ‎—Yes.I agree ________ you.‎ A．to; to B．with; to (2) C．at; with D．for; with ‎25.—I think ________ good to study with a group.‎ ‎—I agree with you.Group work makes us study better.‎ A．that B．it C．its D．this ‎26.The young trees ________ every three days.‎ A．are watered B．were watered C．are watering D．have watered ‎ ‎27. ---Our classroom is so clean . -----It _______every day.‎ ‎ A. is cleaned B. was cleaned C. cleans D. cleaned ‎28. — Do you know anything about Chinese knots (中国结)?‎ ‎ — Yes. They are usually seen 　　　　 symbols of good luck. ‎ ‎ A. for B. by C. with D. as ‎29.________ happens, I'll stand by you.‎ A．So B．But C．Or D．No matter what ‎30.—Could you tell me________ at nine o'clock last night?—, I was washing clothes.‎ A．what you were doing B．what were you doing C．what you are doing D．what are you doing 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1.Girl students in some schools are not allowed (have)long hair.‎ ‎2.We can watch TV after our homework (finish).‎ ‎3.The old (speak) to politely.‎ ‎4.The watch (make) of steel. It (make) in China.‎ ‎5.He wishes China will get better at (make) high-technology products.‎ ‎6.He avoided (answer) my questions.‎ ‎7.Passagers (not allow) to smoke on the train.‎ ‎8.Parents (invite) to school meeting every month.‎ ‎9.It takes several weeks (complete) everything.‎ ‎10.When the leaves are ready,they (pick)by hand and then are sent for __________(process).‎ ‎11．He avoided ________ (watch) the show.‎ ‎12. It’s said that the Great Wall was ________________( build).by hand ‎13.Parents ______(invite) to school meeting every month.‎ ‎14.______________________ (根据) John, you were in Beijing last week.‎ ‎15.Girl students in some schools are not allowed ______(have)long hair.‎ ‎16.English is spoken _____________(wide) in the world.‎ ‎17.We can watch TV after our homework __________ (finish).‎ ‎18.It takes several weeks ____________(complete) everything.‎ ‎19.Sky lanterns are thought of as a symbol of ________(happy).‎ ‎20. It is 　　　　 (wide) known that Australia produces the best wool.‎ 三. 用括号中所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ A: Your new handbag looks so nice. And it (1)　　　　 (feel) nice, too. ‎ B: Yes. It (2)　　　　 (buy) in Hong Kong last month. ‎ A: It (3)　　　　 (cost) much, right?‎ B: Yes. Look at the trademark (商标). It says it (4)　　　　 (make) in Italy. It’s a famous brand. (3)‎ A: Yeah. I have read a report about the brand. But do you know where its leather (皮革) (5)　　　　 (produce)?‎ B: I have no idea.‎ A: In China. Much leather in China (6)　　 　　 (send) to Europe every year. And it is made into bags and shoes there. Then, many of these bags and shoes (7)　　　　 (sell) back to China.‎ B: And the prices (8)　　　　 (rise) a lot? ‎ A: Of course. Usually, they (9)　　　　 (pay) for by the Chinese at a much higher price. ‎ B: It seemed I was taught a lesson by you just now. I will think twice before I buy anything made in foreign countries.‎ ‎ ‎ 四. 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎（be famous for, turn into, such as, send out, be covered with）‎ ‎1. It is free 　　　　　　　　 messages to your friends on QQ or WeChat.‎ ‎2. Weifang has 　　　　　　　　 making kites since over 2,000 years ago.‎ ‎3. The land behind our school 　　　　　　　　 a square by the government last year.‎ ‎4. The room has been empty（空的） for long, so the table 　　　　　　　　 thick dust (灰尘).‎ ‎5. Clay can be made into many lovely things, 　　　　　　　　 animals and kids.‎ 五、词语运用（10小题，每小题1分，共10分） ‎ ‎ 从方框中选择适当的词并用其正确形式填空，。每空限填一词，每词限用一次。‎ interest, , symbol, health, among, festival,‎ tell, see, it, practice, but ‎ Jianzhi is a traditional style of paper cutting in China. It’s been a 1 of Chinese culture for hundreds of years. People started to 2 Jianzhi in China in the 6th century. Jianzhi has a number of special uses in Chinese culture. Almost all of them are for 3 , happiness or peace. Red is used the most commonly 4 all the colors. Since long ago, Chinese people have been 5 in cutting paper into traditional Chinese characters to symbolize the Chinese zodiac (生肖) animals.‎ Paper cutting is popular around the world, 6 only the Chinese paper cutting is listed in the UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage Lists (世界非物质文化遗产名录). The Chinese paper cutting gets 7 place because it has a history of more than 1,500 years and it ‎ ‎ 8 so much of Chinese history and culture.‎ ‎ Paper cutting is still popular in China, especially during special 9 like the Chinese New Year. They are often 10 at Chinese weddings as well. ‎ ‎1. 　　　　　 2. 　　　　　 3. 　　　　　 4. 　　　　　 5. 　　　　　 6. 　　　　　7. 　　　　　 8 　　　　　 9. 　　　　　10. 　　　　　‎ ‎(4)‎ 六. 短文填空 用方框中所给单词填空，使短文完整正确(每个单词限用一次)。‎ gave seen past way asked ‎ ‎ happy hello trouble something lost ‎ ‎ Last Saturday, I went out to see a film after supper. On my (1) to the cinema, I met an Englishman. He looked puzzled (茫然的). So I walked up to him and said (2) to him. His first name was Kevin. I (3) what I could do for him. He told me he (4) his way. So I (5) up the chance to see the film and took Kevin to his hotel while going there, I told him about the great changes that had taken place in my hometown in the (6) few years and Kevin told me (7) interesting about his country, Italy. ‎ Though I couldn’t 8 the film, I felt very (9) , for I had not only helped John get out of (10) , but also practiced my spoken English. I also realized that if I had not worked hard at English, I would not have been able to help Kevin.‎ 七、阅读理解（10分）‎ The Folk Art Show ‎ The best chance to learn about local art and culture.‎ Open: October 20-25‎ Organizer: City Museum Address: 110 Century Road Telephone: 72314431 ‎ Scan the QR code (扫描二维码) to get more information and book tickets.‎ The City Flower Show Open: October 8-17‎ Price: ￥50 for each adult; ￥25 for each child; free under the age of 10; 20% off for groups over 10. ‎ Address:112 New Town Road, Moonlight City Telephone: 53418899 ‎ Visit www. flowersforlife. com for more information.‎ Camp of Folk Art Would you like to learn paper cutting, Huangmei opera or to make paper flowers? ‎ Come to Camp of Folk Art 2014 at the Youth Center!‎ Age: 13 to 18‎ Time: December 13-20 ‎ For more information, call the Youth Center at (010) 1106-2107.‎ Pop Music Week Bands from home and abroad will give performances in Sunshine Park. Local bands and DJs from local radio station are waiting to share music with fans. Good chance for you to make friends with similar hobbies. ‎ Price: ￥30—￥50 ‎ Time: 9:00 a.m.—9:00 p.m., December 21-27‎ ‎ ‎ ‎( )1. By scanning the QR code, you can get .‎ ‎ A. an e-mail from City Museum ‎ ‎ B. more information about the Folk Art Show ‎ C. a ticket to the museum for free ‎ ‎ D. a gift from the City Museum (5)‎ ‎( )2. Tommy is a 9-year-old boy. He wants to visit the City Flower Show with his parents. How much will they pay?‎ ‎ A.￥25. B.￥100. C.￥125. D.￥150.‎ ‎( )3. If Jane wants to learn to make paper flowers, she should go to .‎ ‎ A. Century Road B. New Town Road ‎ ‎ C. the Youth Center D. Sunshine Park ‎ ‎( )4. Phillip, 20 years old, is NOT allowed to go to .‎ ‎ A. the City Flower Show B. Camp of Folk Art ‎ C. the Folk Art Show D. Pop Music Week ‎( )5.The underlined word “performances” means “ ” in Chinese.‎ ‎ A. 艺术 B. 表演 C. 乐器 D. 舞蹈 八．把下列句子改为被动语态:‎ ‎1. Kate’s parents don’t allow her to go out on school nights.‎ Kate _____ _____to go out on school nights by her parents.‎ ‎2. We use chopsticks while eating in our country.‎ Chopsticks ______　_______by us while eating in our country.‎ ‎3. They packed all the books in the room.‎ All the books in the room ______ ________.‎ ‎4.when we light the lanterns, they slowly rise into the air.‎ When the lanterns ,they slowly rise into air.‎ 九. 根据所给的汉语意思完成句子，每空一词。‎ ‎1. 这些西服都是手工制作的。‎ ‎ These suits are all 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　. ‎ ‎2. 网络在我们日常生活中越来越重要了。‎ ‎ The Internet is becoming more and more important 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　.‎ ‎3. 据我所知，西门子在19世纪40年代就创立了。‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 I know, Siemens was set up in the 1840s.‎ ‎4. 无论发生什么，我都会跟你站在一起。‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 happens, I will be on your side.‎ ‎5. 奶酪是由牛奶制成的，所以对身体有好处。‎ ‎ Cheese 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 milk, so it is good for health.‎ ‎6. 中国人通常把红色用作喜庆的颜色。‎ ‎ Red 　　　　　　　　　　　　 as a color of happiness.‎ ‎7. 杭州因为它的美丽风光而闻名。‎ ‎ Hangzhou 　　　　　　　　　　　　 its beautiful sights.‎ Unit6 When was it invented ?‎ 一．短语归纳 ‎1.It's my pleasure.= My pleasure. 我的荣幸 2.seem+to+动词原形 好像做某事 ‎3.such a great invention 如此伟大的一项发明 4.think of = think about 想到，考虑 ‎5.in our daily lives 在我们的日常生活中 6.in my daily life在我的日常生活中 ‎7.have a point 有道理 8.by accident 偶然地，意外地 ‎ ‎9.over an open fire 在篝火上 10.it mentioned that 它提到 ‎ ‎11.It is said that 据说 12.It is believed that人们相信 ‎13.fall into(过去式fell into)=drop into掉进… 14.in the 19th century 在19世纪 ‎15.spread to other countries 传播到其他国家 16.at a low price 以很低的价格 ‎17.bring(brought) sth. to sp.把某物带到某处 18.all of a sudden 突然地 ‎19.less than少于，不到 more than = over 超过20.without doubt 毫无疑问 21.at that time 在那时 22.advise sb (not) to do sth建议某人(不要)做某事 ‎23.start doing sth 开始做某事 24.work on sth 致力于某事 ‎ ‎25.(be) similar to 与……相似 26.the Olympics 奥运会 ‎27.by mistake 错误地，无意地 28.make a mistake 犯错 ‎ ‎29.divide ...into…把…分成… 30.in the end = at last = finally 最后 ‎ ‎31.at the same time 同时 32.teach(taught) sb to do sth 教某人做某事 ‎ ‎33.come up with 想出 34.encourage sb. to do sth.鼓励某人做某事 ‎ ‎35.the purpose of ……的目的 36.stop sb from doing sth 阻止某人做某事 ‎ ‎37.look up to sb.钦佩某人 38.look up the word 查找单词 ‎ ‎39.work together 一起工作 40.I want to achieve my dream.我想实现梦 ‎41.My dream will come true.我的梦想会实现 42.work hard 努力工作 ‎ ‎43.on a hard floor 在坚硬的地板上 44.lead to导致 leader 领导，引路人 ‎ ‎45.Don't mention it.不客气，不用谢 46.translate...into....把…翻译成…‎ ‎47.be used for doing sth=be used to do sth 48.dream of doing sth 梦想做某事 二．用法集萃 ‎1. be used to do 被用来做某事 be used as 被用作…be used by sb. 被某人使用 ‎2.help sb do sth.=help sb. to do sth. 帮助某人做某事 ‎3.make a decision to do sth.=decide to do sth.决定做某事 ‎4.make sb. + adj. 使某人怎么样make sb do sth使某人做某事be made to do sth 被使唤去做某 ‎ ‎5..in this way这样，用这种方式 三语法全解 1． some time 一段时间 sometimes 有时 some times几次 sometime 某个时候 2． one of the world's favorite drinks世界最受欢迎的饮料之一.one of …之一，后面的名词用复数（一般要加S），动词用单数（一般要加S）；favorite,最喜欢的，前面要用“谁的”.‎ 3． thousand千hundred百million百万，当它们前面有数字的时候，它们本身不能加S,当它们后面有of的时候它们要加S，但前面的数字和后面的of不能同时存在 ‎ 4． not…until直到…才,I don‘t go to sleep until 11 every day.我每天直到11点才睡觉。‎ 5． take place 表示预料之中的事情的发生，happen表示预料不到的事情的发生，两个“发生”都没有被动 6． alone adv.独自，如live alone 独自居住； lonely adj,孤单的，如a lonely person 7． enough, 足够的，修饰名词时放前面，如enough money足够的钱; 修饰形容词或副词时放后面，如old enough（年龄）足够大 8． not only ... but also...不但…而且…，句子中的动词要根据but also后面的人来确定单复数(即“就近原则”)，如 Not only I but also she likes the new teacher.‎ 9． the number of …的数量，后面的名词用复数（一般要加S），动词用单数（is） ‎ ‎ a number of 许多…，后面的名词用复数（一般要加S），动词用复数（are）‎ 10． else 和 other 都表示“别的”，else 一般放在who、what等特殊疑问词或somebody 、someone等不定代词后，如someone else别人who else别的谁，而other一般放在名词前，如other animals 11． such和so 都表示“如此”，such 后面一般跟名词短语，如such good weather,而so 后面一般跟形容词或副词，如so beautiful ‎12. 辨析invent; find; find out; discover ‎ invent“发明”，指通过劳动运用聪明才智“发明/创造”出以前从未存在过的新事物 例：Who invented the telephone?‎ He invented a new teaching method．‎ find“找到、发现”，指找到或发现自己所需要的东西或丢失的东西，‎ 着重指找到的结果。‎ 例：We've found oil under the South Sea．‎ I finally found my English book. ‎ find out指经过研究或询问查明某事或真相。‎ 例：I've found you out at last.‎ Please find out when the ship sails for New York.‎ Please find out what time the delegation will come.‎ discover“发现”，表示“偶然”或“经过努力”发现客观存在的事物、真理或错误，即指发现原来客观存在但不为人所知的事物，也可表示发现已为人所知的事物的新的性质或用途。‎ Columbus discovered America in1492．‎ We soon discovered the truth． 我们很快就弄清了真相。‎ ‎13.一般过去时的被动语态（见P188页）‎ ‎ 结构：was/were+过去分词 第六单元检测 一、单项选择 ‎1.I bought this watch price.‎ ‎ A.at a low B.with a low C.at a cheap D.with a cheap ‎2.He met me in a busy street.‎ ‎ A.by accident B.by mistake C.all of sudden D.without doubt ‎3.—Would you like some coffee,please?‎ ‎4.—Why do you speak in a loud voice?‎ ‎—Because I want to make myself clearly.‎ A.such,hear B.so, heard C.such,heard D.so, hear ‎5. Have you ever read books _________ by LUXUN?‎ ‎ A. writing B. written C. are written D. writes ‎6.By accident,one of the world’s most popular drinks ‎ ‎ A. was invented. B. invented C. were invented D.to invent ‎7.—It’s too late. I have to go now.‎ ‎—Oh,it’s raining outside. Don’t leave it stops.‎ A.since B.until C.while D.when ‎8.A year has four seasons and it twelve different star signs(星座).‎ ‎ A.divided into B.is dividing into C.dividing into D.is divided into ‎9.Jessica’s parents always encourage her hard.‎ ‎ A.study B.studying C.to study D.will study ‎10.Annie to the party. She had a wonderful time with us,‎ ‎ A.invites B.is invited C.was invited D.has invited ‎11.Edison was a great . He over 1,000 during his life.‎ ‎ A.invent, invented, inventions B.inventor,invented, invention ‎ C.inventor, invented, inventions D.inventor, invents, inventions ‎12.The number of books in the bookshop is about 10,000 and a number of them ________about science.‎ ‎ A.is B.was C.were D.are ‎13. John failed,he didn’t give up.‎ ‎ A.Although B.Because C.Whether D.unless （1）‎ ‎14.The little boy the river. People nearby hurried to pull him out of it.‎ ‎ A.fell to B.fell into C.fell off D.fell over ‎15.Pizza is ready now,and it nice. Would you like some?‎ ‎ A.smells B.feels C.sounds D./‎ ‎16.Joe was made in front of the whole class.‎ ‎ A.dance B.danced C.to dance D.dancing ‎17.Keys ________ used for ________ the doors. ‎ A．is; opening B．are; opened C．are; opening D．is; opened ‎18.We are divided ________ five groups. ‎ A．in B．into C．as D．with ‎19.The rain stops them________ going shopping.‎ A．to B．for C．from D．at ‎20.________ is believed that Liu Xiang is the best athlete in China.‎ A．I B．That C．It D．This ‎21.Flowers________ along the road last year.‎ A．plant B．planted C．are planted D.were planted ‎22.—A talk on American culture ________ in the school hall yesterday afternoon.‎ ‎—It's a pity.I missed it.‎ A．gave B．was given C．has given D．is given ‎23. The German team would win without any 　　　　. It’s a much better team. ‎ ‎ A. hope B. secret C. interest D. doubt ‎24. — Why do many people buy things online on the 11th of November every year?‎ ‎ — Because there are many sales. The prices are 　　　　.‎ ‎ A. much cheaper B. much lower C. more expensive D. much higher ‎25. — How nice the fish 　　　　! — Really? I am sure you’ll like it better if you try some.‎ ‎ A. smells B. feels C. tastes D. sounds ‎26. — Sorry, sir. But is this umbrella yours?‎ ‎ — Oh, sorry. I just took it 　　　　. Mine is under the seat.‎ ‎ A. for yourself B. by mistake C. in person D. at last ‎27. — The 20th World Cup 　　　　 in Brazil, right?‎ ‎ — Yes. It 　　　　 this summer.‎ A. held; took place B. was held; was taken place C. held; was taken place D. was held; took place ‎28. — Michael Jackson was called the king of pop, wasn’t he?‎ ‎— Of course. He 　　　　 by people all over the world.‎ ‎ A. was looked up B. was looked up to C. looked up D. looked up to ‎ ‎29. — Was table tennis invented by the Chinese?‎ ‎ — No. It 　　　　 in China until the start of the 20th century.‎ ‎ A. played B. was played C. didn’t play D. wasn’t played ‎30. — Do you know 　　　　 in ancient China?‎ ‎ — I have no idea. But I know people once used tree leaves to make paper.‎ ‎ A. how paper was made B. how was paper made ‎ ‎ C. what paper was made D. what was paper made （2）‎ ‎31.Who were the zippers invented ________？A．by B．for C．with D．at ‎ ‎32.—Thanks for the delicious food.‎ ‎—________.‎ A．No, thanks B．That's right C．All right D．My pleasure ‎33. In his free time, he often teaches me how ________.‎ A. swim B. swimming C. to swim D. swims ‎34.The mobile phone has influenced people's life a lot since it ________.‎ A．invents B．inventedC．is invented D．was invented ‎ ‎35.I ________ stay up until 12：00 p．m.last night.‎ A．is allowed to B．was allowed to C．allowed to D．was allowed ‎36.We need some players for the game.________ you ________ your brother can join us.‎ A．Not; but B．Neither; nor C．Either; or D．Not only; but also ‎37. Could you tell me ______? ‎ A.what he said B.he said what C.what did he say D.how he said ‎38.I think the short story_______by Lu Xun. ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ A.is writing B.is written C.written D.was written ‎39. He lived in place __________ Gum Tree.‎ A. called B. name C. named D. Both A and C ‎40. The boy to get supper ready after school.‎ A. were told B. is telling C. was told D. tells 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. Edison (invent) the electric light lamp.‎ ‎2. Since then, we (learn) more than 3000 words.‎ ‎3. The (popular) of his songs is out of our imagination.‎ ‎4. She was a (Canada) singer.‎ ‎5. Basketball has also become a more popular sport for people (watch)‎ ‎6.They tried their best to stop the ship from (go) down.‎ ‎7.The boy dreams of (become) a scientist.‎ ‎8.Many young people looked up to these basketball (hero).‎ ‎9.The number of the league member in our school (be) four hundred.‎ ‎10．When was the bus ________ (invent)? ‎ ‎11．What is it ________ (use) for?‎ ‎12．He ________ (smell) it yesterday in the hospital.‎ ‎13．They help ________ (spread) the popularity of the paper.‎ ‎14．The telephone is________ (use) widely around the world.‎ ‎15. I go jogging for twenty minutes as my 　　　　 (day) exercise.‎ ‎16. The white building was once used as a home for the 　　　　 (rule) of the area.‎ ‎17. It is really my 　　　　 (please) to have a chance to work with you.‎ ‎18. Easter is not a 　　　　 (nation) holiday in China or Japan.‎ ‎19. Jenny’s very 　　　　(music) and loves to sing.‎ 三 用下列词的适当形式填空 A (say，take，tell，study，work，stay，take， invent)‎ ‎1. It is that he is a dishonest boy.‎ ‎2．The story ________ place in 1949.‎ ‎3.The students not to eat or dink in class.‎ ‎4.Our teacher often encourage us hard.‎ ‎5.He was made for ten hours a day by the boss. （3）‎ ‎6．Our parents advised us ________ at home at night.‎ ‎7．These pictures ________ when we took a trip to Kunming.‎ ‎8.One of the world’s favorite drinks by mistake.‎ B. 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ by mistake, divide… into, dream of,look up to, achieve one’s dream ‎1. NBA stars like Kobe Bryant and LeBron James 　　　　　　　　 by millions of people around the world.‎ ‎2. I have 　　　　　　　　 playing for the school football team for years. ‎ ‎3. Nothing but hard work can help you 　 　　　　　　　.‎ ‎4. I deleted (删除) some important e-mails 　　　　　　　　 yesterday. ‎ ‎5. The students 　　　　　　　　 four groups before the games started. ‎ C. 选择合适的动词，并用其正确形式填空，每词限用一次。‎ ‎（sell, smell, mention, lock produce, drink, believe, call）‎ ‎ 1. More than 10 million cars 　　　　 in Shanghai Volkswagen in 2013.‎ ‎ 2. How nice the cake 　　　　! I can’t wait to eat it.‎ ‎ 3. Coffee was first 　　　　 by people in the 11th century.‎ ‎ 4. When to start the project wasn’t 　　　　 in Mr Lee’s speech.‎ ‎ 5. It 　　　　 that cars were invented by some Americans.‎ ‎ 6. The door 　　　　 by Jim yesterday. You should ask him for the key.‎ ‎ 7. Cha Jing is a book about tea written by a Chinese writer 　　　　 Lu Yu.‎ ‎ 8. Shoes made in China 　　　　 all over the world.‎ 四. 按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. The first Starbucks in Beijing was opened in 1999. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 the first Starbucks in Beijing 　　　　?‎ ‎2. The fish was cooked by my mother. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 the fish cooked?‎ ‎3. The wood is used for making paper. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ 　　　　 　　　　 the wood 　　　　 　　　　?‎ ‎4. My parents told me to stay at home alone. (改成含被动语态的句子)‎ ‎ I 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 stay at home alone by my parents.‎ ‎5. Liang Shiqiu translated many of Shakespeare’s plays into Chinese. (改成含被动语态的句子)‎ Many of Shakespeare’s plays 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 Chinese by Liang Shiqiu.‎ 五、根据汉语完成英语句子。(10分)‎ ‎1、据说这片森林里有狼。‎ ‎ It that there are wolves in this forest.‎ ‎2、毫无疑问他是我教过的最好的最聪明的学生。‎ ‎ He is the cleverest student I have ever taught.‎ ‎3、突然，等熄灭了。‎ ‎ All ,the lights went out. （4）‎ ‎4、他们因为他学识渊博而钦佩他。‎ ‎ They to him for his knowledge.‎ ‎5、我拿错了你的钢笔。‎ ‎ I took your pen .‎ ‎6. 不但年轻人喜欢足球，而且老年人也很喜欢足球。‎ ‎ Football is liked by 　　　　 　　　　 the young 　　　　 　　　　 the elderly.‎ ‎7. 人们为了取乐和锻炼而喜欢这项运动。‎ ‎ People enjoy the game for 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　.‎ ‎8 顾客认为这种饮料太酸了。‎ ‎ The drink is thought to be 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　 　　　　.‎ ‎9. 过去几年，女足球迷的数量增加了很多。‎ ‎ In the past years, the number of women football fans 　　　　 　　　　 a lot.‎ ‎10. 教练告诉我们要阻止对方球队自如地传球。‎ ‎ We 　　　　 　　　　 by our coach 　　　　 　　　　 the competing team 　　　　 passing the ball so freely.‎ ‎. 六．短文填空 用方框中所给词语的适当形式填空，使文章通顺、完整。（每词限用一次）‎ ‎, used, is, another, bought, opens, whenever, talking, but also, ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎“Thank you” is widely 1. in a modern society. It is a very good manner. You should say “Thank you” 2. others help you or say something kind to you.For example, when someone-‎ 3. ‎ the door for you, when someone says you have done your work well, when someone says you have 4. a nice shirt, or your city 5. ‎ very beautiful, you should say “Thank you”. “Thank you” is used not only between friends,‎ ‎6. between parents and children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives.‎ ‎“Excuse me” is 7. short polite usage. We use it as the same as “Thank you”. When you hear someone say so behind you, you’d got to know that somebody wants to walk past you without touching you. It is not polite to interrupt (打断) ‎ others while they are 8 . If you want to have a word with one of them, please say “Excuse me” first, and then begin to talk. You should also do so when you want to cough or make any unpleasant noise before others. Let’s say “Thank you” and “Excuse me” on the right occasion. ‎ 七、词语运用 ‎ ‎ 阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的填空，使短文通顺、意思完整。请将答案写在短文后相应题号的横线上。每空限填一词，每词限用一次。方框中有两个词是多余的。‎ ‎. first . centuries French . invented . our ‎ never . development . though . life . keep ‎ It is said that Thomas Alva Edison was the 1 person to say hello over the telephone. But Edison didn’t invent “hello”. As a matter of fact, the greeting (问候) had been used around for 2 before the invention of the telephone in 1876.‎ In ancient times, people greeted (和……打招呼) each other with “hallow”, which may have come from the old 3 word “hola”. ‎ The Americans said “hullo” to each other every day. But “hello” became a way of making contact (联系) after the telephone was 4 .‎ So, Edison made hello a popular greeting and an important part of 5 lives. But Alexander Graham Bell, who invented the telephone, 6 liked “hello” and supported the use of “ahoy”.‎ With the 7 of the telephone, “hello” became a general greeting very soon. Webster’s dictionary kept “hello” a greeting word even 8 Alexander Graham Bell said no to the greeting all his 9 !‎ But the dictionaries continued to 10 “hello” a standard (标准的) greeting in the English language. Hello, Alexander Graham Bell, are you listening?‎ ‎1. 　　　　　 2. 　　　　　 3. 　　　　　 ‎ ‎4. 　　　　　 5. 　　　　　 6. 　　　　　‎ ‎7. 　　　　　 8. 　　　　　 9. 　　　　　10. 　　　　　‎ Unit7 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.‎ 一．短语归纳 ‎1.get his driver’s license 取得驾驶执照 2.no way没门，不行 ‎3.sixteen-year-olds 十六岁的人sixteen-year-old 十六岁的4. be worried about=worry about 担 ‎5. have part-time jobs 做兼职工作 6. get one’s ears pierced 打耳洞 ‎7. get / have / make sth. done 使某物被做…… 8. stop doing sth 停止做某事 ‎9. stop to do sth. 停下来去做某事 10. spend time with sb. 花时间和某人在一起 ‎11.take photos, take a photo 照相 12.use a flash 使用闪光灯 ‎13.all night 整夜 14.stay by my side 呆在我身边 ‎15.make sure = be sure 确保，确定 16.keep sb. (away) from sth使某人远离某物 ‎17. hurt oneself 伤害某人自己 18. give sb. a hug = hug sb. 拥抱某人 ‎19.lift sb.up 举起某人 20. cough badly 剧烈地咳嗽 ‎21. talk back 回嘴 22. an adult 一个成人 ‎23. think back to 回想起 24. regret doing sth. 后悔做了某事 ‎25. make one’s own decision 做某人自己的觉得 26.too + adj.+ to do sth. 太…而不能做某事 ‎27.learn…from…从…学到… 28.agree with sb 同意某人的观点 ‎29.disagree with sb. 不同意某人的观点 30.move out 搬出去 ‎31.take care of = look after=care for 照顾 32.manage one’s own life 管理自己的生活 ‎33.manage to do sth 努力完成某事 34. that is why 那就是为什么…‎ ‎35.continue to do sth继续做某事 36. take a test参加考试 ‎37.pass the test通过考试 38.fail the test考试不及格 ‎39.be strict with sb in sth在某方面对某人要求严格40.get in the way of妨碍…‎ ‎41.a running star一个跑步明星 42.a professional runner一个专业的跑步运动员 ‎43.grow up长大 44.allow sb. to do sth.允许某人做某人 ‎45.should be allowed to do sth. 应该被允许去做某事 ‎46.have nothing against doing sth.不反对做某事 47.succeed in doing sth.成功做某事 ‎48.fail to do sth. 做某事失败 49.end up with 以…结束 end up as 最终成为 ‎50.practice doing sth.练习做某事 51.see sb. do sth. 看见某人做了某事 ‎52.spend time on sth.在某事上花时间 spend time in doing sth在做某事上花时间 ‎53. care about sb.关心某人 54.talk with sb. about sth.和某人谈论某事 ‎55.make a choice做选择 56.have a chance to do sth.有机会去做某事 二．用法集萃 ‎1．She is a sixteen-year-old girl.=She is sixteen years old.‎ ‎2. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事（主动语态）‎ ‎　be allowed to do sth. 被允许做某事（被动语态）‎ ‎　Mother allows me to watch TV every night. ‎ ‎　LiLy is allowed to go to America. ‎ ‎3. get their ears pierced 穿耳洞 ‎　让/使（别人）做某事　 get sth. done(过去分词)‎ ‎　　　　　　　　　　　 have sth. done ‎　I get my hair cut. == I have my hair cut. ‎ ‎4. enough 足够　‎ ‎　形容词＋enough 如：beautiful enough　足够漂亮 ‎ enough＋名词　如：enough food 足够食物 ‎ enough…to 　足够…去做…‎ 例：I have enough money to go to Beijing. 我有足够的钱去北京。‎ ‎ She is old enough to go to school.她够大去读书了。‎ ‎5. stop doing sth. 停止做某事　Please stop speaking.‎ stop to do sth. 停止下来去做某事　Please stop to speak.‎ ‎6. 系动词用法：系动词+adj 常用的系动词有：look, feel, be, become, get, turn, smell, taste, stay(保持), kept等。连系动词除be和become等少数词可接名词作表语外，一般都是接形容词。‎ ‎　例：They are very happy. He became a doctor two years ago. ‎ She felt very tired. The grass turns green.‎ ‎7. get in the way of 碍事，妨碍 如： ‎ Her social life got in the way of her studies.‎ ‎8. also 用于句中 I also like apples.‎ ‎ either用于否定句句末 I don’t like apples, either.‎ ‎ too 用于肯定句句末 I like apples, too.‎ 第七单元检测题 一．单项选择 ‎1. — Excuse me, sir. But your bike gets 　　　　 the way of my car.‎ ‎ — Sorry. I didn’t see your car. A. in B. at C. on D. inside ‎2. — I am afraid the room is 　　　　 for us to live in.‎ ‎— Yes, it is. But let’s make do (将就) with it.‎ ‎ A. too large B. large enough C. too tiny D. tiny enough ‎3. — Do you need a helping hand with the job? — I can 　　　　 it. Thanks anyway.‎ ‎ A. manage B. support C. encourage D. refuse ‎ ‎4. — My bike is broken. What should I do? — You can get it 　　　　 in that bike shop.‎ ‎ A. repair B. repaired C. repairs D. to repair ‎5. — How I regret 　　　　 when my father told me not to play computer games!‎ ‎— You’d better say sorry to him.‎ ‎ A. talked back B. talking back C. to talk back D. to talking back ‎6. — Do you mean you will join the club? — Yes, I am 　　　　 it.‎ A. nervous about B. tired of C. careful with D. serious about ‎7. — 　　　　 must the machine be checked? — It needs checking every month.‎ ‎ A. How long B. How many C. How often D. How soon ‎8. — Mom, would you allow me to swim in the lake? — 　　　　. The lake is so large and deep. ‎ ‎ A. Not at all B. No problem C. Never mind D. No way ‎9. — Do you agree that students should be made 　　　　 some housework at home?‎ ‎ — I can’t agree more. It can help them grow up.‎ ‎ A. to do B. do C. doing D. to doing ‎11. — Why 　　　　 most stars 　　　　 in the daytime?— Because the sun is too bright.‎ ‎ A. can’t; see 　　　 B. can’t; be seen C. weren’t; see D. weren’t; seen ‎12.We should manage ________ our housework.‎ A．do B．did C．to do D．doing ‎13.Work hard, ________ you will succeed. ‎ A．or B．so C．and D．but ‎ ‎14.The trees must ________ three times a week.‎ A．water B．watering C．be watered D．waters ‎15.All the mobile phones must ________ before the meeting starts.‎ A．turn off B．be turned off C．be turning off D．turned off ‎16.Jim wants to get his hair ________.It's too long.‎ A．cut B．cutted C．cuts D．cutting ‎17.—It's difficult to get to the other side of the river.—I think a bridge ________ over the river.‎ ‎ A．should be built B．should build C．will build D．has built ‎18..Things should ________ here before you enter the library.‎ A．keeps B．are kept C．be kept D．keep ‎19. Do you still remember_______me somewhere in Shanghai?—Yes, of course. Two years ago.‎ ‎ A. to see B. see C. seeing D. saw ‎20.Little children should be kept ________ deep water.‎ A．out of B．from C．away D．away from ‎21.—John, you ________ go out to play until your homework ________. —OK, Mum.‎ A．must; finishes B．can't; is finished C．can't; has finished D．needn't; finishes ‎22.Sometimes our hobbies can our study.‎ ‎ A.get in the way of B.get into C.get out of D.get on ‎23.—Which universty do you want to enter?—It’s hard for me a decision.‎ A.do B.to do C.make D.to make ‎24.I don’t think should be allowed to drive.‎ ‎ A.sixteen-year-old B.sixteen-years-old ‎ C.sixteen-years-olds D.sixteen-year-olds ‎25.Should a teenager to get a driving licence?‎ ‎ A.be allow B.allow C.be allowed D.allowed ‎26.Our teacher is always strict us and strict his work.‎ ‎ A.with,with B.in,in C.with,in C.in,with ‎27.You should be punished if you to your teacher.‎ ‎ A.will talk back B.talk back C.will talk to D.talk to ‎28.—Let’s go to the community if it tomorrow.‎ ‎ —But nobody knows if it tomorrow.‎ ‎ A.won’t rain; rains B.doesn’t rain,rains ‎ ‎ C.doesn’t rain; will rain D.won’t rain; will rain ‎29. We all want to see him ______his dreams.‎ ‎ A.achieve B.achieving C.to achieve D.achieved ‎30. He regretted _______that apartment three years ago.‎ ‎ A.not buying B.not bought C.not to buy D.was not buying ‎31. Sorry, your car ______in front of the hotel.‎ ‎ A. can put B. be not put C. can’t be put D .can be not put ‎32. Young trees should be . ‎ ‎ A. taken good care B. take good care of C .well looked after ‎33. Can you tell _______? A. when did it happen B. when was it happened ‎ C. when it happened D. when it was happened 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．Phototaking is ________ (allow) in the museum.‎ ‎2．He is too young ________ (clean) the room.‎ ‎3．I have made many ________ (decide)．‎ ‎4．I can learn a lot from ________ (do) my homework.‎ ‎5．Parents should give their children chances ________ (do) what they can.‎ ‎6．I am ________ (excite) about going shopping.‎ ‎7．He is allowed ________ (watch) TV after supper.‎ ‎8．I regret not ________ (listen) to Mom.‎ ‎9．I need to spend more time ________ (play) on the playground. ‎ ‎10．It is hard ________ (keep) reading English every day.‎ ‎11．She practiced ________ (play) the piano when she was young.‎ ‎12.Should the old (speak) to politely?‎ ‎13.No matter how many (difficult) we have,I believe all problems can be solved.‎ ‎14.If you work hard,you won’t worry about your (succeed).‎ ‎15.I have nothing againist (sing) loudly.‎ ‎16.I think I should be allowed to make this (choose) myself.‎ ‎17. We should encourage the children_____________(eat)more vegetalbes.‎ ‎18. They seem _______________(go )on vacation today.‎ ‎19.I _____________(allow)to take the test later. I feel happy.‎ ‎20. You need _____________(practice) speaking English with your foreign teacher.‎ ‎21. Some toys ______ （buy）as a presents for these children last Monday. ‎ ‎22 He thinks his daughter shouldn't get her ears ________. （pierce ）‎ ‎23. I’m worried about the 　　　　　 (safe) of the product.‎ ‎24. When I realized my mistake, I 　　　　　 (regret) not taking my mother’s advice.‎ ‎25. Teens should be 　　　　　 (educate) to be polite to the elderly.‎ ‎26. 　　　　　 (smoke) is not allowed in this area.‎ ‎27. It’s hard for me to make a 　　　　　 (decide) right now.‎ 三 选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎（一 ） (be strict with, talk back, move out, make sure, stay out)‎ A: You don’t look happy. What’s up?‎ B: Well, I (1)　　　　　 to my parents when they asked me to stop playing games on the iPad.‎ A: Did they get angry?‎ B: I don’t know. I just think why they (2)　　　　　 me all the time.‎ A: That’s because they want to (3)　 　　　　 you are doing your best to be a good boy.‎ B: They want me to be perfect. But nobody can be perfect, right? I think they are too hard on me. For example, I am not allowed (4)　　　　　 in the evening.‎ A: They want you to keep safe. ‎ B: But I am old enough to look after myself. Sometimes I can’t stand (忍受) their endless chatter (唠叨) and I even want to (5)　　　　　 .‎ A: I hope you don’t mean it. They chatter because they care about you a lot. ‎ ‎（二）（get in the way, worry about, grow up be serious about, take care of—）‎ ‎1. It’s great pleasure to see my child 　　 　　　 healthily and happily day by day.‎ ‎2. The boys must be told 　　　　　 their goal. They should think more about it.‎ ‎3. The dog 　　　　　 by my uncle when we were on holiday. ‎ ‎4. Pardon me, sir. But you’ve 　　　　　 of my car. ‎ ‎5.I didn’t tell my parents about the accident because I didn’t want to make them 　　 　　　 ——————me. ‎ 四. 根据课文内容，填写合适的单词，完成下面的句子，每空一词。‎ ‎(against; hobbies; supported success train; achieved disagree ,choice enter; nothing ) ‎ ‎1. Teenagers’ 　　　　　 could get in the way of their schoolwork. It’s possible for parents to worry about their children’s 　　　　　 at school. ‎ ‎2. Liu Yu, who is an excellent runner, won’t be allowed to 　　　　　 much, although all his races have been ‎ 　　　　　 by his parents.‎ ‎3. The reason why Liu Yu is told to give up his dream isn’t that his parents are 　　　 　　 running. They think Liu Yu should think about what if this dream isn’t 　　　　　.‎ ‎4. Liu Yu understands that it’s important to work hard and 　　　　　 university, but he wants to do ‎ 　　　　　 but keep running.‎ ‎5. Liu Yu and his parents 　　　　　 with each other. Liu’s parents don’t allow him to train at night while Liu wants to make the 　　　　　 himself.‎ 五. 按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. Teachers should encourage students to speak out their own thoughts. (改成含被动语态的句子)‎ Students 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　 ____________speak out their thoughts by teachers.‎ ‎2. Parents must stop children from playing computer games too much. (改成含被动语态的句子)‎ ‎ Children 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　　 playing computer games too much by parents.‎ ‎3. I think that he is coming tomorrow. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ I_______think that he____________coming tomorrow. ‎ ‎4. Fifteen-year-olds are not old enough to drive a car. (改为同义句)‎ ‎ ‎ Fifteen-year-olds are　　　young　　　drive a car. ‎ ‎5. We didn’t play tennis yesterday. Instead, we played basketball. (合并为一句)‎ ‎ ‎ We played basketball______ ______ ______ tennis yesterday. ‎ ‎6.Can you mend this radio? ____ this radio ____ ____?‎ ‎7. I saw him come into the classroom.（变为被动 语态）‎ ‎ He _______ _______ _______ _______ into the classroom.‎ ‎8. Li Lei gave Tom a new pen last week . （同上）‎ ‎ A new pen _____ _______ _____ Tom last week . ‎ 六、选词并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎ difference, anymore, , , do, family, interest, friend, daughter，‎ A Most parents shout at their children when their son or 1 fails to do his/her homework. But my parents are 2. They often say, “Play more, read more, and watch more.” Sometimes when I am doing my homework at night, my dad will say to me, “Do not do it 3. Go to play!” Sometimes I am puzzled and wonder about the reason. Then they will answer, “You are a big girl now. You can do what you’re 4 in. We think you have the right.” I thank my parents for being so thoughtful. In many 5 , parents and children can’t communicate well. Parents usually make their children 6 what they don’t want to do. Things are different with me. I have open-minded and humorous parents. My family also has a 7 warm atmosphere(气氛). I like my parents very much, and I think they are very cool.‎ ‎1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________‎ ‎6.________ 7.________ ‎ B选词填空 ‎ ‎.阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的词填空（每次限用一次）‎ grows running against dream professional ‎ Liu Yu, a fifteen-year-old boy from Shandong, is a ____1____ star. He is on his school team and has always wanted to be a professional runner when he ___2____up. However, his parents won’t allow him to train so much. “Of course we want to see him achieve his ___3_____,” says Mr. Liu. “And we know how much he loves running. My wife and I have supported every one of his races. We have nothing ____4____ running! But we think our son needs to think about other possible jobs. He’s getting older now, so he needs to think about what will happen if he doesn’t end up a ‎ __5_____runner.”‎ 七、读写综合(‎ 请阅读下面这篇文章，根据所提供的信息，完成信息卡。‎ In classes, your teachers will talk about topics that you are studying.The information they provide will be important for you to know when you take tests.So you must be able to take good written notes from what your teachers say.‎ Here are the three stages (阶段) of taking notes and what you should do during each stage.‎ ‎1．Before Class Review your notes you have taken before you come to class.This will be good for remembering what was covered.Get you ready to understand new information your teacher will provide.‎ ‎2．During Class Keep your attention on what your teacher is saying and ‘the signal words’ that tell you what your teacher is going to say and it is important to write in your notes.Examples of signal words are ‘The most important point...’ and ‘Remember that...’ Be sure to include in your notes information that your teacher repeats or writes on the blackboard.Write quickly so that you can include all the important information in your notes.Do this by writing abbreviations such as med for medicine, using symbols such as % for percent, and writing short sentences.‎ ‎3．After Class Rewrite your notes to make them more complete and accurate (准确的) by changing abbreviations into whole words, symbols into words, and shortened sentences into longer sentences.Use them to answer your questions.If necessary, ask your teacher for help.‎ Information Card Taking notes Reason(s)‎ The information that is provided by the teachers about studying topics is useful for your tests, so it is necessary for you to learn to take good notes.‎ Stages Before Class ‎●Review the notes you have taken to 81.________ what was overed.‎ ‎●82.________ to understand new information.‎ During Class ‎●83.________ to your teacher carefully.‎ ‎●Be sure to 84.________ the important points.‎ ‎●Write them down 85.________.‎ After Class ‎ ‎●Make your notes more complete and accurate to answer your questions.‎ ‎●Ask for your teacher's help.‎ 八、书面表达。（15分）‎ 国有国法，校有校规。在你的学校中一定有很多规章制度来规范中学生的行为，使学生们都能健康成长。请你写一篇小短文向大家介绍某条校规、校纪，如能用自己的观点来评价就更好了。（70词左右）‎ There are many rules in our school, At our school we have to wear uniforms every day. The problem is that all my classmates think the uniforms are ugly. I think young people should look ‎ smart and so I’d like to wear my own clothes. If we have to wear uniforms, we should be allowed to design our own uniforms. That would be a good way to keep both teachers and students happy.‎ Unit 8 It must belong to Caral 一．短语归纳 ‎1. belong to… 属于… 2. toy truck 玩具卡车 ‎3. her favorite writer 她最喜爱的作家 4. the only little lid唯一的小孩 ‎5. listen to pop music听流行音乐 6. hair band 发带 ‎7. attend a concert 参加音乐会 8. in the music hall 在音乐大厅 ‎9. something valuable 贵重的东西 10.go to a picnic=go for a picnic去野餐 ‎11. at the picnic在野餐时 12. the rest of my friends 我其余的朋友 ‎13. pick it up 捡起，拾起 14. each other=one another 互相，彼此 ‎15. nothing much没什么（事） 16. something unusual不寻常的东西 ‎17. something strange奇怪的事 18. anything else其它的东西 ‎19. be interviewed by… 被…采访 20. strange noises 奇怪的声音 ‎21. outside our window在我们的窗外 22. next-door neighbor隔壁邻居 ‎23. at first 首先，起初 24. run away 逃走 ‎25. feel uneasy 感到不安 26. have no idea=don’t know 不知道 ‎27. go away 走开，离开 28. noise-maker 噪音的制造者 ‎29. have fun doing sth.做某事开心 30. create fear制造恐惧 ‎31. in the neighborhood 在社区 32. There must be …doing sth. 一定有…在做某事 ‎33. in the laboratory 在实验室 34. hear water running听见流水声 ‎35. cough a lot 咳得厉害 36. run after追赶 ‎ ‎37. a woman with a camera 一位拿相机的妇女 38. at work 在工作 ‎ ‎39.might be late for work 可能上 40. must be dreaming一定在做梦 ‎ ‎41. run for exercise跑步锻炼 42. run to do sth. 跑着去做某事 ‎ ‎43. catch a bus 赶公共汽车 44. make a movie 拍电影 ‎45. wear a suit 穿西服/套装 46. express a difference / result表达差异 / 结果 ‎47. add information 添加信息 48. at the same time 同时 ‎49. a rock circle 一个石头圈 50. not only …but also…不仅…而且…‎ ‎51.Britain’s most famous historical places 英国最著名的的 历史名胜 ‎52.receive more than 10 visitors 接待10多名游客 ‎ ‎53.on the longest day of the year 在一年中最长的那天 54. ancient leaders古代领导者 ‎ ‎55. a group of… 一群… 56.. a bit late 有点晚儿 ‎ ‎57. communicate with the gods 与上帝交流58 so many centuries ago许多世纪前 ‎ ‎59. point out 指出 60. a kind of calendar 一种日历 ‎61. put together 放在一起 62. in a certain way 以某种方式 ‎63. on midsummer’s morning 在仲夏的上午44.shine directly into… 直接照进…‎ ‎65. the center of the stones石头的中心 66. a medical purpose 一个医学目的 ‎67. prevent illness 阻止疾病 68. move up 上升，提升 ‎69. from your feet move up your body 从你的脚上升到你的身体 ‎70. the position of… …的位置 71.for a special purpose为了一个特别的目的 ‎72. a burial place 一个墓地 73. a place to honor ancestors祭拜祖先的地方 ‎74.celebrate a victory over an enemy庆祝战胜敌人75. a long period of time 很长一段时间 二．用法集萃 1. must, may, might, could, may, can’t+动词原形 表示推测，程度不同 must 一定,肯定(100%的可能性)‎ may, might, could有可能, 也许(20%－80%的可能性)‎ can’t 不可能, 不会(可能性几乎为零)‎ 例：The dictionary must be mine. It has my name on it. ‎ The CD might/could/may belong to Tony, because he likes listening to pop music.‎ The hair band can’t be Bob’s. After all, he is boy!‎ ‎2. take place 常指“(某事)按计划进行或按计划发生”(二者都无被动)‎ happen常指具体事件的发生，特别指那些偶然或未能预见的“发生”‎ 例:Great changes have taken place in China since.‎ New things are happening all around us. ‎ take place还有“举行”之意。‎ 例:The meeting will take place next Friday.‎ happen还可表示“碰巧；恰好”之意 例:It happened that I had no money on me.‎ ‎3. try to do sth.尝试做某事 ‎ try/do one’s best to do sth. 尽某人的最大努力去做某事 例：I try to climb the tree. ‎ He tried his best to run. ‎ ‎4. there be sb./ sth. doing ‎ 例：There is a cat eating fish.‎ There must be something visiting our home.‎ ‎5. 辨析because of , because because of +名词/代词/名词性短语 because +从句 例：I do it because I like it. 我做这件事是因为我喜欢。‎ I had to move because of my job. 因为工作的原因我得搬家。‎ ‎6. anything strange 一些奇怪的东西 当形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时，放在这些词的后面 第八单元检测 一单项选择 ‎1. Mary ______ be in Paris.I saw her in town only a few minutes ago. ‎ ‎ A. mustn’t B. shouldn’t C. can’t D. may not ‎2. I can’t find my backpack. It _________ still at school. ‎ A. can be B. might be C. must be ‎3．--whose book is this ? --It be Lucy’s. Look, Her name is on the cover. ‎ ‎ A. can B. must C. may D. could ‎4．Jack’s bike is blue, so this yellow one ________ be his. ‎ ‎ A.mustn’t B.can’t C.couldn’t D.mightn’t ‎5.The guitar ________ belong to Alice. Only she plays the guitar here. ‎ ‎ A．could B．must C．can’t D．Can ‎6.—What do you think “upset” mean?—I’m not sure. It ______ mean sad, ‎ ‎ A.must B.can C.might D.can’t ‎7.This backpack must be ______. I saw her carry it yesterday. ‎ ‎ A．Lucys B．Lucy C．Lucys’ D．Lucy’s ‎8.I didn’t hear the phone. I ___ asleep. ‎ ‎ A. must be B. must have been C. should be D. should have been ‎ ‎9. —Whose T - shirt is this?—It ______ be John' s. It’s ______ small for him.‎ ‎ A. can't; much too B. can't; too much C. mustn't; much too ‎ ‎10.There are so many kinds of MP3 in the shop. We can’t decide______.‎ ‎ A.what to buy. B.to buy what C.which to buy D.to buy which.‎ ‎11.-Which of these two sweaters will you take?‎ ‎ -I’ll take____.They look nearly the same,and I just need one.‎ ‎ A. both B.either C.none D.all ‎12.Do you have _________________ to say?‎ ‎ A. something else B. else something C. anything else D. else anything ‎13. 　　　　 did Li Hui and Wu Fei visit the old people’s home, 　　　　 I visited it yesterday.‎ ‎ A. Either; or B. Both; and C. Neither; nor D. Not only; but ‎ ‎14. — Could you please write down your advice for us? — 　　　　. ‎ ‎ A. Thank you B. That’s all right C. With pleasure D. It doesn’t matter ‎ ‎15. May I go swimming now? --- No, you ____. You must finish your homework first.‎ ‎　　A. mustn’t B. may not C. couldn’t D. needn’t ‎ ‎16. --- Must I finish my homework now?‎ ‎--- No, you ______. You may have a rest first.‎ ‎　　A. mustn’t B. can’t C. may not D. needn’t ‎ ‎17. Cars and buses ______ stop when the traffic lights turn red. ‎ ‎ A. can B. need C. may D. must ‎18. These books ____ out of the reading room. You have to read them here.‎ ‎ A. can’t take B. must be taken C. can take D. mustn’t be taken ‎19. _________ this book be yours? - No, it ________ not be mine. It ________ be his. A. Can, must, may B. May, might, must C. Can, may, must D. Must, can, may 20.Look! There is some paper on the ground. Let's ________.‎ A．pick it up B．pick up it C．pick them up D．pick up them ‎21.The reporter was ________ last Monday.‎ A．interview B．interviewing C．to interview D．interviewed ‎22.The children are having fun ________ on the playground.‎ A．to play B．play C．playing D．played ‎23.We often see Bob ________ pingpong in the park.‎ A．play B．to play C．playing D．played ‎24.—Whose notebook is this?—It ________ be Li Ming's.It has his name on it.‎ A．must B．can'tC．could D．might ‎25.I heard someone ________ in the next door just now.‎ A．speak B．to speak C．speaking D．speaks ‎26.—Is Mr.Smith over there?—It ________ be him.He has gone to Beijing on business.‎ A．can't B．must C．might D．can ‎28.It's our duty to prevent the environment ________ being polluted .‎ A．of B．for C．from D．in ‎29.This book must belong ________ Mike.‎ A．by B．at C．on D．to ‎30.We don't know ________.‎ A．when was the old temple built B．when the old temple was built C．when is the old temple built D．when the old temple is built ‎31.One of my ______ homework wasn't handed in today.‎ ‎ A. classmate’s B. classmates’s C. classmates’‎ ‎32. We’re going to have holiday next month． ‎ ‎ A．two month B．two-month C．a two month’s D. a two-month ‎33.It used be very quiet. Ever happened around here.‎ ‎ A.nothing much B.much nothing C.nothing many D.many nothing ‎34.I couldn’t see a dog or ,either.‎ ‎ A.anything else B.else anything C.other anything D.anything other ‎35. I try to read this book,I feel sleepy.‎ ‎ A.Whatever B.However C.Whenever D.Never ‎36.The book must . She’s the only one who’s studying French.‎ A.blong to Li Ying’s B.be Li YingC.belong Li Ying’s D.belong to Li Ying ‎37. Not only I but also Tom   fond of watching television.‎ ‎ A.is B.are C.am D.were ‎38. Thank you so much for _________my mistakes in the homework.‎ A.giving out B.looking out C.pointing out D.picking up ‎39. ._____ more accidents, we should slow down the driving speed.‎ A. To prevent B. To make C. Stop D. To keep ‎40.-It’s difficult for the village children to cross the river for school.‎ ‎ -I think a bridge(桥)______over the river.‎ ‎ A.should be built B.is being built C.has been built D.was built 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．The ________ (write) is very famous.‎ ‎2．This book is ________ (value) for us to learn English.‎ ‎3．The ________ (policeman) were searching the forest for the lost kid.‎ ‎4．I________ (use) to be afraid of dark.‎ ‎5．She was sure of________ (finish) the work on time.‎ ‎6．The little boy feels ________ (sleep) at noon.‎ ‎7.My book can’t (steal) because it was here jusy now.‎ ‎8.The noise-maker is having too much fun (creat) fear in the neighborhood.‎ ‎9.Look out! There must be someone (knock) at the door.‎ ‎10.Terracotta Army(秦始皇兵马俑)is one of the most (history) palces.‎ ‎11.Many people believe the stone have a (medicine) purpose.‎ ‎12.The heavy rain kept us from (come) on time.‎ ‎13.She’s the only one who wears such (color) clothes.‎ ‎14. 　　　　　 (wolf) are usually friendly and helpful to each other when they live in groups.‎ ‎15. Some 　　　　　 (policeman) were searching the house for useful clues (线索).‎ ‎16. Some model teachers were invited 　　　　　 (attend) the meeting.‎ ‎17．Please remember _______________(close) the window when you leave.‎ ‎18． Do you feel like ___________ (have) a drink? 要喝一杯吗?‎ ‎19. There is a boy ________ （play ）basketball on the playground.‎ ‎20．We had fun________ （swim） in the river last Sunday.‎ ‎ 三 从方框中选择合适的单词或词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ A (usual, run away, used to, might, have fun)‎ There is a park near my home. In the park, there are some bushes (树丛). I (1)　　　　　 enjoy doing some reading on the bench (长凳) beside the bushes. But now, I always tell myself to keep away from the bushes.‎ Last Sunday, I went to read on a bench there. I was (2)　　　　　 reading my favorite Sherlock Holmes when I suddenly heard something (3)　　　　　 from the bushes. It sounded like a small animal walking through the bushes.‎ ‎ I thought it (4) be a cat or something like that and took no notice of it. Suddenly, a yellow four-legged, cat-like animal ran past me. I couldn’t help shouting! I didn’t know what it was. And I (5)　　　　　 as fast as I could.‎ Later I told my father about it. He told me it must be a weasel (黄鼠狼). However, it made me afraid. ‎ 四. 根据课文内容，填写合适的单词，完成下面的表格。每空一词。‎ ‎（. circle ，calendar . receives . ideas ，communicate，medical. Leaders，‎ position ，How ，known）‎ It’s a rock (1)　　　　　 in Great Britain.‎ It (2)　　　　　 over 750,000 visitors every year. June is the best time for people to enjoy the sunrise.‎ Nobody is sure about it. But there are several ‎ ‎(3)　　　.‎ It was built as a temple for ancient leaders to (4)　　　　　 with the gods. But actually it was built before the (5)　　　　　 arrived in England.‎ It was built as a kind of (6)　　　　　. The stones were put together so that on midsummer’s morning, the sun could shine directly into the center of the stones.‎ It has a (7)　　　　　 purpose.‎ Most people think the (8)　　　　　 of the stones is for a special purpose.‎ ‎(9)　　　　　 it was built almost 5,000 years ago is a great mystery.‎ By whom it was built is still not (10)　　　　　 to people.‎ ‎ 五、根据汉语翻译英语。‎ ‎1.这本书属于琳达的，因为在封面上有她的名字。‎ ‎ The book Linda,because her name is on the cover.‎ ‎2.一定有什么东西闯入我们社区的住户家中。‎ ‎ There something visiting the homes in our neighborhood.‎ ‎3.其他人认为它是为庆祝战胜敌人而建的。‎ ‎ Others think it was built to a over an enemy.‎ ‎4.我们的确知道他一定很勤奋—而且是伟大的规划者！‎ ‎ We know they have been hard-working）—and great planners!‎ ‎5.他可能在为即将到来的英语考试而学习。‎ He could for the coming English exam.‎ 六. 按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. The coat next to mine is Jacky’s. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ 　　　　　 　　　　　 the coat next to yours?‎ ‎2. I am sure there is somebody in the room. (改写成意思相同的句子)‎ ‎ There 　　　　　 　　　　　 somebody in the room.‎ ‎3. It’s impossible that Jim has been to the Great Wall. (改写成意思相同的句子)‎ ‎ Jim 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　　 to the Great Wall.‎ ‎4. We didn’t find anything strange in the library. (改写成意思相同的句子)‎ ‎ We 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　　 in the library.‎ ‎5. I don’t know what made the frightening sound. (改写成意思相同的句子)‎ ‎ I 　　　　　 　　　　　 　　　　　 what made the frightening sound. ‎ 七先阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从方框中所给的词语中选出最恰当的10个，用其适当形式填空。每个词限用一次。‎ play 、 activity 、 favorite 、 also 、 stop 、 life 、 example、 happen 、 learn、 new 、‎ ‎ When you finish high school or university, is learning done? The answer is “no”. In many countries, people continue learning all their lives. Why is lifelong(终身的)learning important? How can it help you? Let’s look at one 1 ________of lifelong learning in Japan.‎ You go to school and learn .You study. You take tests. But 2.________ doesn’t only happen in school. learning doesn’t 3.__________ when you graduate from high school or college .You are learning all the time. For example, learning can 4.__________ when you go to a museum . It can 5.___________ happen when you get a job. You learn when you 6._________ a sport or when you take a trip. Learning is 7.___________! We never stop learning . Every day you can improve yourself by learning something 8.__________.‎ In Japan, lifelong learning is very important .People in Japan like to try new learning 9._________.Music ,handwriting and foreign languages are some of their 10_____ classes. The Japanese take classes to improve their skills and learn new things.‎ 八. 任务型阅读（10分）‎ Taking kids to the movies sounds like fun. Now we have some suggestions for you. ‎ Choose the right movie and date.‎ Make sure that you’ve chosen a suitable movie for your children’s ages and that the running time isn’t too long. Avoid opening days, especially with younger children, as too many people can mean long lines and more noise.‎ Buy the tickets ahead of time and bring your own snacks.‎ Save yourself time at the ticket box and snack bars. You can buy your tickets online. And bringing snacks from home saves money as well as time. You can bring a box of popcorn (爆米花) to share. Also, bringing small drinks can help to avoid toilet trips.‎ Let the kids know the rules.‎ It’s time to talk about a few rules. Make sure your children know the usual cinema rules about being quiet, staying in their seats and not disturbing (打扰) other people. Ask them to tell you some rules before you go inside the cinema—that’ll make sure they can remember them. ‎ Save the attention span (持续时间) for the movie.‎ Trying to keep your kids sitting for two hours can be difficult. Make it easy on them by skipping (跳过) the endless previews (预告片) and ads at the start of a movie. Ask about when the movie will start and don’t get into the theatre until then. ‎ 根据短文内容，完成表格，每空不超过三个单词。‎ Suggestions on taking kids to the movies Choose the right movie and date.‎ Choose a movie that is suitable for your children’s ages. ‎ Don’t go to the movies (1)　 　　　　　　　.‎ Buy the tickets ahead of time and bring your own snacks.‎ Buy tickets online.‎ Bring snacks from home to save （2)　　　　　　　　.‎ Let the kids know the rules.‎ Talk about the rules with your children and make sure they can (3)　　　　　　　　 by asking them to tell you some rules.‎ Save the attention span for the movie.‎ Skip the previews and ads at (4)　　　　　　　　 the movie. Don’t get into the cinema until (5)　　　　　　　　.‎ ‎46. on opening days 47. money and time 48. remember them ‎ ‎49. the start of 50. the movie starts Unit 9 I like music that I can dance to 一．短语归纳 ‎1. dance to (music) 随着（音乐）跳舞 2. sing along with 随着…一起唱 ‎3. musicians who play different kinds of music弹奏不同类型音乐的音乐家 ‎4. electronic music 电子音乐 5. not much 没什么（事）‎ ‎6. suppose sb to do sth. 猜想某人做某事 7. be supposed to do sth 应该做某事 ‎8. suppose sb (to be) +adj. 原以为… 9. have spare time 有空闲时间 ‎10. in one’s spare time在某人的空闲时间 11. spare the time to do sth 抽时间做…‎ ‎12. a film director 一名电影导演 13. think too much 想太多 ‎14. in that case 既然那样 15. World War II 第二次世界大战 ‎16. smooth music 悦耳的音乐 17. prefer A to B 比起B来更喜欢A ‎18. prefer doing A to doing B 19. prefer to do sth. rather than do sth. ‎ ‎20. feel like doing sth 想要做某事 21. stick to 坚持，固守 ‎22. be down 悲哀，沮丧 23. cheer sb up 使… 高兴/ 振奋 ‎24. have a happy ending 有个美满的结局 ‎ ‎25. try one’s best to do sth. 尽某人最大努力做…‎ ‎26. less serious 不那么严重 27. a good way to do sth 做某事的好办法 ‎28. make me feel even sadder 让我感觉更伤心 ‎29. provide plenty of information about a certain subject提供了大量的关于某个主题的信息 ‎30. shut off my brain 关闭我的大脑 31. in time 及时 on time 按时/准时 ‎32. once in a while 偶尔的，有时 33.write one’s own lyrics 自己写歌词 ‎34.sing the words clearly歌词唱的清楚 35. take sb to sw.带某人去某地 ‎36. Chinese folk music 中国民间音乐 37.be played on the erhu 由二胡演奏的 ‎38 move sb.感动某人, sb. be moved by… 39. strangely beautiful 异常的/出奇的美 ‎40. sense a strong sadness and pain 感觉到一种强烈的伤感和痛苦 ‎41. one of the most moving pieces of mus 最令人感动的乐曲之一 ‎42. look up 查看，查阅 43. be written by sb. 由/ 被…写的 ‎44. in the city of… 在…市 45. play many musical instruments 弹奏很多的乐器 ‎46. by age 17 到17岁的时候 47. be known for musical ability 因音乐才能而出名 ‎48. develop a serious illness 得了一种很重的病 ‎49. become blind 成了盲人，变瞎 50. for several years 几年 ‎51. make money 赚钱 52. get married (to sb) （和某人）结婚 ‎53. continue to do sth. 继续做某事 54.perform in this way用这种形式表演 ‎55. during/ in one’s lifetime在某人有生之年 56. by the end of… 到…末为止 ‎57. It’s a pity that… … 遗憾的是… 58. in total 总共 ‎59. be recorded for the future world to hear 被记录下来供后人聆听 ‎60. the great erhu masters 很棒的二胡大师 61. master a foreign language 掌握一门外语 ‎62. praise …for… 因为…赞美 63. China’s national treasures 中国的国家珍宝 ‎64. paint a picture of…描绘了一幅…画 65. recall one’s deepest wounds 唤起某人最深的伤痛 ‎66. painful experiences 痛苦的经历 67. a time for spreading joy 传播快乐的时间 二．用法集萃 ‎1.prefer的用法 ‎【1】prefer A to B、A与B相比较,比较喜欢A 例:I prefer English to Chinese. I　prefer　fish　to　meat.‎ ‎【2】prefer doing A to doing B,A与B相比,比较喜欢做A 例：I prefer swimming to running. ‎【3】prefer to do A rather than do B，A与B相比,比较喜欢做A 例：I preferred to stay behind rather than go with you.‎ ‎【4】词组prefer not to do “不愿意做……”‎ ‎2. whatever 相当于no matter what 例:Wherever you go, whatever you do, I’ll be right here waiting for you. ‎3. cheer up高兴起来；振作起来 使欢乐；使高兴 例:Cheer up！Your troubles will soon be over．‎ He tried to cheer them up with funny stories．‎ 1. marry娶;嫁;结婚;和...结婚 marry sb. / get married 表示动作 例. He married a pretty girl. ‎ She married a soldier. =She got married to a soldier. ‎ They got married last year. ‎ ‎4. keep healthy 保持健康 例. In order to keep healthy, he keeps jogging every day. ‎ keep in good health, keep fit和 stay healthy 都表示“保持健康”‎ 巧记以o结尾的名词变复数：‎ 注：,hero英雄,tomato西红柿,potato土豆,这些词变复数时要加是-es,‎ 其余以o结尾的加-s。　‎ ‎5.定语从句观察两个句子,看看有什么区别: ‎ an interesting book 　　形容词interesting做定语修饰book ‎ a book that is interesting 　　　that is interesting句子做定语修饰book ‎ interesting/that is interesting作用是相同的,都是用作定语来修饰名词book, 这种在复合句中修饰名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。 ‎ 定义：复合句中，修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。定语从句要跟在所修饰的名词或代词后面，被定语从句修饰的名词或代词叫做先行词。定语从句一般用关系代词who，that，which和whose来引导，放在从句的句首使从句与主句相连，并在句中担当一定的成分。 ‎ ‎　　I like music that I can dance to. (作宾语)‎ ‎　　I prefer singers who can write their own songs. (作主语) ‎ 注1：That在从句中作主语或宾语(作宾语时that 可省略) ‎ 第九单元检测题 一、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．There are a lot of excellent ________ (director) in this country.‎ ‎2．I try my best ________ (solve) the problems.‎ ‎3．You are too tired ________ (go) to school.‎ ‎4．It is fun ________ (have) a party.‎ ‎5. There is something wrong with her eyes. She can’t see things _______ (clear).‎ ‎6．We should learn how ________ (deal) with difficulties. ‎ ‎7．It is easy for me ________ (work) out the problem.‎ ‎8．The ________ (pain) expression (表情) on her face suggested that she had known the sad news. 　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　‎ ‎9．Could you tell me where ________ (go) to the hotel? ‎ ‎10．Would you mind ________ (do) his work?‎ ‎11．I'm thirsty.Could you give me something ________ (drink)．‎ ‎12．I feel like ________ (take) a photo.‎ ‎13 Do you know a girl _____ (call) Yang Liping?‎ 二单项选择 ‎1.—Laura enjoys story books.—Me, too.‎ ‎ A. reading B. read C. to read ‎2. —What fun The Croods is! —Yeah! I like the movie, too. It’s so _______.‎ ‎ A.boring B. scary C. interesting D. sad ‎3. Many children are left alone in the countryside. Let’s try our best them.‎ ‎ A. help B. helping C. to help D. helps ‎4. —Do you like Zhou Libo's talk show?‎ ‎ —Yes. His talk show is very funny. It always makes people _______.‎ A. laugh B. laughed C. laughing D. to laugh ‎5. You don’t have to _______ every new word in the dictionary while reading.‎ ‎ A. look for B. look up C. look at D. look after ‎6. —Alice prefers _______ to _______.—Then, let’s ask her to take part in our dancing club.‎ ‎ A. dancing, singing B. dancing, sing C. sing, dancing D. to sing, dance ‎7. He is ________ clever boy. A. so an B. a so C. such an D. such a ‎8. The bananas taste ______ and sell _______.‎ ‎ A. well; well B. good; good C. good; well D. well; good ‎9. —What kind of music do you like?‎ ‎ —I like music that I can sing along _______ or dance _______.‎ ‎ A. to; with B. with; with C. to; to D. with; to ‎10. —What kind of music do you like? ‎ ‎ —I like music ______ I can dance to. ‎ A. because B. when C. who D. that ‎ ‎11. —He looks unhappy today.—Let’s .‎ ‎ A. cheer him up B. help out him C. look him after D. argue with him 12. ‎— I'd like a cup of black coffee. What about you, Maggie?‎ ‎ — I prefer coffee ______ sugar. A. than B. for C. with D. to ‎13. —Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to the People's Hospital?‎ ‎ —Walk along this street ______ the end and you'll find it on your left.‎ ‎ A. in B. to C. by D. at ‎14. The woman _______ is singing in the hall is our teacher.‎ ‎ A. what B. which C. who D. whom ‎15.—What do you think of Jay’s new CD? —________. I’ve listened to it many times.‎ ‎ A. Not at all B. Of course C. I enjoy it very much D. I really don’t like it ‎16. The book he bought yesterday is very interesting. ‎ A. 不填 B. why C. when D. what ‎17. Yao Ming is a famous basketball star is playing in the NBA.‎ A. whose B. who C. what D. which ‎18.—Is the girl ______is interviewing the manager of that company your friend?‎ ‎—Yes, she is a journalist from CCTV. A. whom B. which C. who D. whose ‎19. Do you know the man ___ is sitting behind Nancy? ‎ A. what B. which C. who D. whom ‎20.We were just ________ time to finish our homework.‎ A．in B．by C．at D．for ‎21.—Why don't you go out to play, Rose?—I'm afraid I can't.I have much homework ________.‎ A．do B．does C．doing D．to do ‎22.—What do you think of the school uniforms?‎ ‎—Very good.I like clothes ________ make me feel comfortable.‎ A．that B．what C．who D．whose ‎23.—May I play computer games, Mom?—No, you ________.‎ A．don't B．can't C．wouldn't D．won't ‎24.I was looking for the pen ________ I bought yesterday when you called me.‎ A．who B．where C．which D．what ‎ ‎25.My pen pal Andrew found it difficult ________ Chinese well.‎ A．learning B．learn C．to learn D．learned ‎26.—Now many people smoke and get ill.—So we should do something ________ can help stop smoking.A．what B．who C．/ D．that ‎ ‎27.I prefer ________ some sports to ________ TV at home on weekends.‎ A．do; watching B．doing; watch C．do; watch D．doing; watching ‎28.It's a custom in China to have some tea or other drinks before the meal ________.‎ A．serves B．served C．is served D．will be served ‎29.Barclays Bank is one of the ________ banks in the world.‎ A．big B．bigger C．biggest D．biger ‎30.—Do you enjoy My heart will go on?—No, I prefer songs ________ loud.‎ A．that is B．which is C．that are D．what are ‎31.—What kind of house would you like? —I'd like ________ with a garden in front of ________.A．it; one B．one; one C．one; it D．it; it ‎ ‎32.Neither he nor I________ from Canada.We are from Australia.‎ A．is B．are C．am D．be ‎33.Jessica's parents always encourage her ________ out her opinions.‎ A．speak B．speaking C．to speak D．will speak 三 A 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ stick to, in that case, plenty of, shut off, once in a while ‎1. — It will cost about 2,000 yuan to fly to Sanya.‎ ‎ — Well, 　　　　　 , why not fly to Guangzhou first and then take a train there?‎ ‎2. Once you have started the job, it’s better 　　　　　 it until it is completed.‎ ‎3. Your phone must 　　　　　 before the plane takes off.‎ ‎4. “The Continent” is a good movie with 　　　　　 jokes. It makes me laugh and think a lot.‎ ‎5. I like pop music best, but I listen to some country music 　　　　　 .‎ A. 从方框中选择合适的词组，并用其适当形式填空。‎ ‎（sound like, a piece of, develop， an illness, in this way, during one’s lifetime）‎ ‎1. Deng Lijun sang many beautiful songs 　　　　　 .‎ ‎2. Deng Lijun 　　　　　 called asthma (哮喘) in her forties. Many people believe that asthma killed her.‎ ‎3. I love listening to English songs. I think I can improve my English 　　　　　 .‎ ‎4. Why not listen to 　　　　　 music and have a rest?‎ ‎5. The movie The House That Never Dies (《京城81号》) 　　　　　 a ghost (鬼) story. But in fact, there is no ghost in it. ‎ 四.A 根据课文内容，用合适的词填空完成下面的句子。 （under， by， recall ，worse， recorded ，become， himself ，instruments ，moving ，treasures）‎ ‎1. Erquan Yingyue, which I heard at a concert of Chinese folk music was very . I sensed a strong sadness and pain the beauty.‎ ‎2. Abing’s father taught him to play many musical . However, his father died and Abing’s life grew .‎ ‎3. Abing’s illness made him blind He made a living _________singing and playing music on the streets.‎ ‎4. Abing could play more than 600 pieces of music, many of which were written by _______But ‎ it’s a pity that only 6 pieces were.____________‎ ‎5. Abing’s music has become one of China’s national________ because its sad beauty 　　 　　　 makes people___________ their deepest wounds. ‎ B． 根据方框中所给词完成短文 ‎（write, influenced, events, least, travel ，personal, Internet, improve, useful Most）‎ Over ten years ago, blogs(博客) were mostly just online diaries written by teenagers. Today, they are so much more. Blogs have become powerful enough to influence the media(媒体), or even the governments.‎ It’s said that the number of blogs on the 1. is between 10 to 32 million. Many of these are 2. blogs that people use to keep in touch with their friends. But some are public ones on superstars, sports and up-to-date （最新的）3. .‎ Studies show that 30 percent of Americans have read a blog at 4. once. Even if people do not read blogs regularly(定期地), they might still be ‎ ‎5. by them in some way.‎ Now，people are starting to ask: Will blogging take the place of other types of media? The answer is “NO”. Most bloggers do not do first-hand reporting. Unlike reporters, they do not 6. ————to the places or meet people they 7. about. They just get information from other media for their blogs. But blogs might help 8. the quality of other media. Reporters are more careful when they know bloggers will point out their mistakes.‎ 五、读写综合(‎ 请阅读下面这篇文章，根据所提供的信息，完成信息卡。‎ How important is music? When they are asked this question, students and parents usually answer that music is nice, but not very important.It is often considered only as entertainment, but not the first choice for education.This opinion is shortsighted (短视的)．In fact, music education is necessary and important for all students.‎ Music tells us who we are.Music reflects (反映) the creators' thinking and values, as well as the social environment it came from.For example, just as Mozart music represents a lifestyle, rock music (摇滚乐) represents a lifestyle, too.The jazz(爵士乐) influence that George Gershwin and other musicians introduced into their music is obviously American, because it came from American musical traditions.‎ Music provides a kind of ability to know the world in a different way.Science explains how the sun rises and sets.Music explores the emotive (情感的) meanings.We need every possible way to discover and respond (回应) to our world because no one way can get it all.‎ Music is a form of thought, as powerful as science.It is a way we human beings “talk” to each other.Through the language we express our feelings, our discoveries, our ideas, our imagination and our hopes so that they can be shared with others.When we do not let our children receive good music education, we take away from them the meanings that music expresses.Science does not tell us what it means to be human.Music does.‎ So music education is much more necessary than people generally realize.‎ Information Card Passage ‎ outline Detailed information Introduction Shortsighted opinion; Music is only a way of 1.________， not the top choice for education.‎ Truth: Music education is important for all students.‎ Main ‎ Body A way to tell who we are Music not only reflects the social environment it came from but also expresses people's thinking and 2.________.‎ A way to know the world We can't discover and respond to our world in just one way.‎ ‎3．________ explains how nature goes.‎ Music explores the emotive meanings of nature.‎ A way to communicate with each other We use music to 4.________ our feelings, discoveries, ideas, imagination and hopes with others.‎ Music, 5.________ from science, tells us what it means to be human.‎ Conclusion Music education is necessary.‎ 六. 任务型阅读 ‎ There is always something that we can never forget. And it can really change our life.‎ ‎ Time is important for us. It organizes our everyday moments. However, ①before I received a watch from my father, time never had any importance in my life. It organized my life and made me more responsible.‎ ‎ I received this gift on a Sunday. I had to go to the airport at 9:00 am to pick up Uncle Jim and take him to my father’s house. However, I was late because I hung out with my friends. Later on that day, around 11:00 am, I remembered my uncle and went to the airport to meet him, but I was too late. He had left the airport and taken a taxi to my father’s house.‎ ‎ I got to my father’s house at 2:00 pm that day. ②Looking at my father’s face, I felt ashamed(羞愧的) at that moment. My father asked me to go next to him and he handed me this watch. Then he said, “Bob, did you have fun with your friends today?” “Yes, Father, and I’m sorry about not ‎ picking up Uncle Jim.” I replied. He then said, “What you did was not very nice and you should be sorry for your actions. I think you should learn something from it, and this watch will be a reminder for you in your future life.” ③The watch is very important to me, not because of its price, but because of the lesson that I learned from it. ‎ ‎ Today I still remember my father’s words “Respect time and never be late for anything.” ‎ 根据短文内容，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1 请用“not…until…”改写文中①处画线的句子，使其句意不变。‎ ‎________________________________________‎ ‎2. 请改写文中②处画线部分，使其句意不变_________________________________________‎ ‎3. 请将文中③处画线句子翻译成汉语。 ________________________________________‎ 根据文章内容，回答下列问题。‎ ‎4. Why did Bob feel ashamed when he arrived at his father’s house? _________________________________________‎ ‎5. What lesson did Bob learn from his father? ‎ 七. 书面表达 目前中学生学习任务重，学习压力大，而广泛的阅读有利于开拓视野，调节身心。在业余生活中，你喜欢阅读吗？你喜欢读什么样的书呢？作为中学生的你是如何看待阅读的呢？请就这个话题，谈谈你的想法和理由，可适当给出建议。‎ 注意：1. 词数：80词左右；‎ ‎2. 文中不得出现真实的地名、校名和人名；‎ ‎3. 要求条理清楚，语意连贯，字迹工整，可适当发挥。‎ I am a student. Though I’m busy with my lessons, my free time is full of happiness and joy. I love reading because it helps me study better. I often do some reading in the evening. I think books are our best friends. They give us much knowledge. I find reading books is a good way to relax myself. At the same time it can also help me open up my eyes to the outside world. So I suggest that teachers should give us less homework so that we can have more time to read. ‎ Unit 10 You are supposed to shake hands 一．短语归纳 ‎1. be supposed to do sth 应该做… 2. be expected to do sth. 应该/被期望做…‎ ‎3. shake hands (with…) (和…) 握手 4. bow to sb. 向某人鞠躬 ‎5. for the first time 首次，第一次 6. people in Korea 韩国的人们 ‎7. greet sb.( in) the wrong way以错误的方式问候某人8. be invited to sw. 被邀请去…‎ ‎9. be invited to do sth. 被邀请做… 10.welcome party 欢迎会 ‎11. as soon as 一… 就…（引导时间状从） 12. as soon as sb can 尽可能快的。。。‎ ‎13.hold out (my hands) 伸出（我的手） 14. on both sides of my face在我的两个脸颊上 ‎15. be from= come from 来自 16. be relaxed about 对…放松/随意 ‎17. a bit/ little late 晚一点 18. value the time we spend with sb珍惜我们与某人度过的时间 ‎ 19. in our everyday lives 在我们的日常生活中 20. drop by 顺便拜访，随便进入 ‎21. make plans ( to do sth.) 计划做某事 22. plan to do sth.计划做某事 ‎23. on the side of the face在脸的一侧 24. the town center 在城镇中心 ‎25. as many as sb can = as many as possible 尽可能多的…‎ ‎26. be on time 守时 27. the capital of clocks and watches钟表之都 ‎28. after all 毕竟，终归 29. at noon 在中午 ‎30. 15 minutes late 迟到15分钟 31. get / be mad (at sb) 生气，气愤 ‎32.make an effort (to do sth) 努力做…33.avoid heavy traffic 避免交通拥挤 ‎34.keep sb waiting让某人一直等候 35.without calling first 没有事先打电话 ‎36.go abroad 出国 at home 在国内 37. be important to 对…是重要的 ‎38. bring your passport 带护照 39.clean … off 把…擦掉 ‎40 clean the chalk off the blackboard 把黑板上的粉笔字擦掉 ‎41.the northern coast of Norway 挪威的北海岸 ‎42. during the winter season 在冬季 43. knock at/ on 敲（门，窗…）‎ ‎44. take off 脱下，起飞 45. be worth doing sth. 值得做…‎ ‎46. table manners 餐桌礼仪 47. mind your manners 注意你的礼仪 ‎48. stick …into… 把... 插进… 49.hit an empty bowl 敲空碗 ‎50. point at指着, point to指向 （侧重方向） 51. at the table 在餐桌旁 ‎52 at table 在吃饭 53.basic table manners 基本的餐桌礼仪 ‎54. my biggest challenge 我最大的挑战55. on my student exchange program 在我的交换生生 ‎56.there is no reason to do sth.没原因做 ‎ ‎57. go out of one’s way (to do sth.)特地做某事…, 格外努力做…‎ ‎58.make sb feel at home 使某人感到宾至如归 ‎59. a teenage granddaughter 一个十几岁的（外）孙女 ‎60. talk to sb in French用法语和…交谈 61.be comfortable doing 舒服/轻松做某事 ‎62.behave well/ badly/ politely举止好 63. behave oneself 举止规矩 ‎64. as you can imagine 正如你想象的那样 65. be different from 与…不同 ‎66.be / get used to sth 习惯于某事 be / get used to doing sth.习惯于做某事 ‎67. gradually get used to sth逐渐习惯某事 68. cut it up 把它切开 ‎69. eat it with a fork 用叉子吃它 ‎ ‎70.put your elbows on the table 把肘部放在桌子上 ‎71. have a safe trip 一路平安，旅途愉快 72. show up 出席，露面，到场，‎ 二．用法集萃1.   （1）suppose：猜想;假设 suppose that表示“猜测;假设”，that可省 例：I suppose he is a student. ‎ ‎   （2）be supposed to do sth被期望做某事，应该做某事。相当于 should ‎ 例：We are supposed to stop smoking. ‎ ‎2. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事　‎ 例She has made plans to go to Beijing.=She has planed to go to Beijing.  ‎ go out of one’s way to do 特意，专门做某事　‎ 例：He went out of his way to make me happy.‎ ‎3. In Switzerland, it’s very important to be on time.‎ 分析：it是形式主语，不定式是真正的主语。‎ 例：To clean the blackboard is your job.＝It’s your job to clean the blackboard.  ‎ ‎4. We are the land of watches, after all. 毕竟我们是钟表王国。 ‎ ‎  （1）the land of watches钟表王国 例：China is the land of bikes.‎ ‎（2）after all毕竟 例：After all your brother is a little kid.   ‎ ‎ 【练习】 Don’t be angry with her, _____ she is your mother. ‎ ‎  A. at first      B. by the way       C. after all       D. in a word   ‎ ‎5. Thanks for...＝Thank you for...表示“因...而感谢”，后接名词、代词或者动名词 ‎6. 辨析except和besides ‎  （1）except“除......之外”不包括所说的东西 例：I get up early except Sunday. （不包括星期天）‎ ‎       Nobody was late for the meeting except me today.        ‎ ‎  （2）besides的意思是“除了......之外，还有”‎ ‎     例：Five others are late besides me. （包含我在内）‎ ‎7. not ...any more=no more 不再 not... any  longer＝no longer 不再 ‎ 例：The boy didn’t cry any more/longer when he saw his mother.       ‎ ‎【练习】Don’t try to fool us. We are not children _______ ‎ ‎   A. any longer     B. any more     C. after all      D. A, B and C ‎ ‎8.辨析maybe和may be ‎  （1）maybe 副词：“大概、或许”，常用于句首表示不确定的猜测。 ‎ ‎     例：Maybe your father is at home. ‎ ‎  （2）may be 情态动词：may＋动词原形be构成句子的谓语，情态动词may表示推测，译为：也许  许、可能 ‎【练习】Look at that tall man. He ______ your new teacher. ‎ ‎   A. maybe      B. really be      C. to be   ‎ 第十单元检测题 一．单项选择 ‎ ‎1. In China, students ______ greet the teachers when classes begin.‎ A.are supposed to B.are suppose to C.supposed to D.suppose to ‎2. The plane will ________ from Beijing Capital Airport and land in London.‎ ‎ A. take on B. take off C. take out D. take away 3. The peaceful music in the CD made the students ‎ ‎ relaxed. A. feel B. feels C. felt D. to feel ‎4. —Peter has changed a lot, hasn’t he?‎ ‎ —Yes. He used to the guitar, but now he is more in playing soccer.‎ ‎ A. plays; interested B. play; interested C. play; interesting D. playing; interest ‎5. All the people went home _____ Job, for he had to finish his work.‎ ‎ A. with B. besides C. except D.well done. ‎ ‎6. — Could we see each other at 9 o’clock tomorrow morning?‎ ‎— Sorry, let’s make it ______ time.‎ A. other’s B. the other C. another D. other ‎7. —Have you read today’s newspaper?.—Not yet. Is there______ ?‎ ‎ A.anything important B.important anything C.something important ‎ ‎8.—Oh, dear! Who’s broken my glasses? —______ he ______ I. It was your cat.‎ ‎ A. Both; and B.Not only; but also C. Either; or D. Neither; nor ‎9.In France, it’s ______ to say you are full. A.impolite B.polite C.nice D.friendly ‎10. —Will you come to the dinner party? —I won’t come until Jenny ________.‎ ‎ A. will be invited B. can be invited C. invited D. is invited ‎11. John _______ Beijing the day before yesterday.‎ A. arrived at B. arrived C. reached to D. arrived in ‎12.You can’t be expected ________ a foreign language well in several months.‎ ‎ A. to learn B. learning C. learnt ‎ ‎13. It’s too hot. Do you mind ______ the window?‎ ‎ A. my closing B. my opening C. to open D. to close ‎14. I think _____ not difficult _____ English every morning．‎ ‎ A. that; keep reading B．it’s; keep readingC. that; to keep reading D．it; to keep reading ‎15.—I don’t know when ______ tomorrow?—I will call you as soon as he ______.‎ ‎ A. will he come; arrives B. he will come; arrives C.he will come; will arrive ‎16.Tomorrow is Labor Day.He ________ his uncle.‎ A．dropped by B．drop by C．drops by D．will drop by ‎ ‎17.—We are going on a school trip tomorrow. —________.‎ A．Excuse meB．I'm sorry to hear that C．You're welcome D．Have a good time ‎18.Jack ________ dislike the weather in Beijing in spring, because there is so much wind and sand.But now he ________ it.‎ ‎ A．is used to; used to B．used to; is used to C．was used to; is used to ‎ ‎19.—Shall we go for a picnic tomorrow?—Well, it all ________ the weather.‎ A．belongs to B．happens to C．depends on ‎ ‎20.Our plane is ________ in a few minutes.Please be seated ‎ A．turning off B．putting off C．taking off D．getting off ‎21.—You look sad.What has happened?—Everyone ________ us to win the match, ‎ A．expects B．expected C．hopes D．hoped ‎22.—Jim, would you please clean your clothes? ________， you are no longer a child.‎ ‎—All right, I'm coming.A．First of all B．After all C．As a result ‎ ‎23.—We'll go for a picnic if it________ this Sunday.—Wish you a lovely weekend.‎ A．rain B．doesn't rain C．won't rain D．rains ‎24.It is polite ________ a smile when you visit somebody for the first time.‎ A．take B．taking C．to take D．take to do ‎ ‎25.The peaceful music in the CD made the students ________ relaxed.‎ A．feel B．feels C．felt D．to feel ‎26.I found it difficult ________ a language.‎ A．mastering B．master C．to master D．mastered ‎27.It's nice of you ________ me.‎ A．help B．helping C．to help D．helps ‎28.________ wonderful to spend our summer on the island.‎ A．We're B．It's C．That's D．What ‎29.Your Tshirt is so cool.Could you please ________？‎ A．telling me what you bought it B．tell me where you bought it C．telling me what you buy it D．tell me where you buy it ‎30.The man ________ his shoes before entering the room.‎ A．cleaned dirt off B．cleaned dirt in C．dropped dirt off D．dropped dirt in ‎31. I find ________ hard for me ________ the work in such a short time.‎ A. it; finishing B. it’s; finish C. it; to finish ‎ ‎32.—George was heard ________ just now.What happened?—People was telling a joke.‎ A．to cry B．cry C．to laugh D．laugh ‎33.Every student who ________ in the same group takes part in his birthday party.‎ A．study B．studies C．are studying D．have studied ‎34.—Huangyan Island belongs to China.—Surely it does! We Chinese will never ________ it up.‎ A．cut B．give C．mix D．set ‎35.It is all right if you come　　　late. A. a bit of B. a little of C. a bit D. too much ‎36.You shouldn’t kiss her. You are supposed to bow ________ .‎ A. instead B. instead of C. either ‎ ‎37. I’m sorry I’m late. I should get here 10 minutes ________. ‎ A. early B. earlier C. the earliest ‎38. If you _________ to a party, you have to be there on time.‎ A. invite B. were invited C. are invited ‎39. All the students went to the park ________ Julie, because she was ill.‎ A. except B. besides C. beside ‎40. The local clubs are making an effort ________ more young peple.‎ A.interest B. to interest C. interested ‎41. This is Mrs. Brown ________ daughter is a teacher.‎ A. which B. whose C. when 二、用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1．We expected ________ (have) fun in our school. ‎ ‎2．To his ________ (surprised), they succeed.‎ ‎3．There are many trees on both ________ (side) of the street.‎ ‎4．He didn't mind ________ (open) the door as it's hot.‎ ‎5．I make many ________ (plan) for my study.‎ ‎4．Listen! There is someone ________ (knock) on the door.‎ ‎5 The book is worth ________ (read)‎ ‎6．Thanks for ________ (give) me the message.‎ ‎7．Before ________ (go) home, we did some shopping in the supermarket.‎ ‎8．There are many different ________ (manner) in different areas.‎ ‎9．You have to ________ (cut) it off.‎ ‎10．I find it difficult ________ (remember) French.‎ ‎11．I used ________ (pick) up him by bike.‎ ‎12．The mountain is ________ (water) by plane. ‎ ‎13．The Chinese is ________ (translate) into Japanese.‎ ‎14．I was made ________ (do) many things.‎ ‎15．I ________ (spend) five days in Nanjing last month.‎ ‎16.Could you tell me how to ________( behave) at the table?‎ 三 请用适当的词完成这篇短文，每个空只能填写一个形式正确、意义相符的单词。‎ ‎(一)（.too　.study　.Then　.for　.playing．chat　.have　.music　.concerts．The）‎ My biggest problem is that I am too busy.When I was young, I used to have1.________ much time, but these days I get up early and 2.________ in school all day.3.________ I go right home and eat dinner.Before I started 4.________ school, I used to spend a lot of time 5.________ games with my friends, but I just don't have the time anymore.In the evening, I used to watch TV or 6.________ with my grandmother, but now I 7.________ to study.I love 8.________， and my father used to take me to the concerts.These days, I hardly ever have time for 9.________.I do homework and go to bed.I really miss 10.________ old days.‎ ‎(二) (prefer lots week’s families popular vegetables cook both usually following )‎ Do you know the word brunch? In the west, many people like to have brunch—late breakfast or early lunch. People 1 have brunch between 10.a.m and 2.p.m on Sunday because they 2 to get up late after a 3 hard work or want to enjoy brunch with their parents, children or friends. That is a relaxing and interesting way of eating for most 4 .‎ Today brunch has become most 5 in big hotels. One can either ask for or 6 it himself. To make it look like 7 breakfast and lunch. People choose to have 8 of dishes. You can often see the 9 food on the table：meat, eggs, fruit, 10 , orange juice, tea and bacon..‎ 四 阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的动词，并用其适当形式填空。有的需要加助动词 。‎ ‎ tell run pull give be ‎ One day, a dentist was starting his morning work. Suddenly a man 1_____________ in. His face was red and he could only say “Quick! Quick!” The dentist thought he must be very ill. So he helped the poor man sit in a chair at once. Then he 2 ___________ the man some medicine to help him sleep. After that, he looked into the man’s mouth carefully. A few minutes later all the bad teeth 3________ out. As soon as the man woke up, he said in a low voice, “Quick, doctor, quick.”‎ ‎“It 4________ over for minutes.” the dentist told him, “It’s all right now. You can leave now.”‎ ‎“You don’t understand,” said the man, “I came 5__________you that your house is on fire.” ‎ 五 信息归纳 A．请阅读下面这篇文章，根据所提供的信息，完成信息卡。‎ We spoke to three students from around the world about different national holidays.There are different customs (习俗) for each festival.‎ Tan Xiaodong, 15, Hong Kong, China ‎“It'll soon be Chinese New Year.Before it, we'll clean the house and decorate it for good luck.Every shop is going to close for a few days and we'll go out a lot to celebrate in the streets.We might go and see the lion and dragon dances in the city center.I love this festival.”‎ Wendy, 16, Sydney, Australia ‎“Australia Day is on 26th January and it's an important holiday here.We always have a Monday off, so we celebrate for three days.My parents and I go to the countryside for a picnic and friends always come over.Many people go to beach parties or street parties and there's lots of music and dancing.What fun！”‎ Amy, 14, New York, USA ‎“The first Thanksgiving Day was hundreds of years ago when Europeans who came to America thanked God for his help.It's still a very important day for families to be together.This year we're going to visit my grandparents and we'll eat a delicious meal of turkey.Thanksgiving Day is on the fourth Thursday in November every year.”‎ Information Card The number of festivals told about in the passage ‎81.________.‎ Tan Xiaodong During the Chinese New Year, tourists can see 82.________.‎ Wendy On Australia day, families often have a meal 83.________.‎ Amy On Thanksgiving Day, families get together and eat a meal of 84.________.‎ What we can learn from the passage Different festivals have 85.________.‎ ‎（B）阅读下面的材料，然后在表格中完成内容摘要，每空不超过三个单词。‎ ‎ Eating habits are different in different countries. The Chinese have a saying “Eat good things for breakfast, eat a big meal for lunch, but eat less at dinner.” Many Americans think one should start the day with a good breakfast, but their ideas about lunch and dinner are different.‎ ‎ Most Americans only give themselves a short time for lunch. So they eat a small lunch. After work they will have more time to eat a big dinner at home. Also a quiet dinner at home with all the family talking about their day is a way to take a good rest after a long, hard day of work.‎ ‎  Eating at restaurants is also different. In China, people like to talk and laugh while eating. Very often you can hear people talking and laughing loudly, and they are just having a good time. In America it is not like this. They want a quiet place where they can eat a good meal far away from the noises of the outside world. If someone is talking too loudly, the manager of the restaurant will look at him or her angrily. If some people are talking too loudly, the manager of the restaurant may come out and ask them to be quiet.‎ Title:1 in different countries Chinese Americans ‎●2 for breakfast ‎● Eat a big meal for lunch.‎ ‎● 4. Eat at dinner ‎● Like to talk and laugh while eating ‎● Start the day with a good breakfast ‎● Eat a 3 lunch.‎ ‎● Prefer a big dinner at home or restaurant ‎● Like to eat 5. the noises 六、阅读理解。‎ Different countries have different customs in giving presents.In China you must never give a clock to a Chinese person, because the pronunciation of the word for “clock” in Chinese is similar to the pronunciation of “death”．Also, don't wrap (用……包裹) a present in white, black, or blue paper, because they are the colours for funerals (葬礼)．Don't give a knife, because something sharp can cut a friendship.‎ In Russia if you give flowers as presents, you have to give an odd number of them (One, Three, five, etc.) because even numbers of flowers are for funerals. ‎ In Germany if you are invited to dinner, flowers are good presents to take to your dinner hostess (女主人), but don't take her red roses because it means you are in love with her.Don't take thirteen of anything because it's an unlucky number.Don't take an even number of anything, either.Don't wrap your presents in white, brown, or black paper.‎ ‎1.According to the passage, ________ must never be given to Chinese people as presents.‎ A．flowers B．clothes C．food D．clocks ‎ ‎2.People don't wrap presents in black or white paper in________.‎ A．Germany B．China C．both China and Germany D．both China and Russia ‎ ‎3.What does the underlined word “even” mean in Chinese in the passage?‎ A．奇数的 B．偶数的 C．甚至 D．平坦的 ‎ ‎(　　)4.What presents can you take to your dinner hostess in Germany?‎ A．Thirteen of something.B．Flowers except red roses.‎ C．An even number of something.D．Something wrapped in brown paper.‎ ‎(　　)5.Which is the best title of the passage? ‎ A．Foreigners' Presents B．Giving Flowers as Presents C．Different Customs in Giving Presents D．Don't Give Thirteen of Anything as Presents 七书面表达 ‎（一）不同的国家有不同的风俗习惯。请根据以下信息，写一篇短文介绍各国不同的餐桌礼仪。‎ 中国人 用筷子吃饭，嘴巴不应该在进餐时发出响声 日本人 吃面条或饮茶时嘴巴发出响声是礼貌的，表示食物美味和感谢 西方人 用刀叉进食，一餐可能会用到多套刀叉，欧洲的餐桌礼仪比美国更复杂些 Different countries have different customs.Let's have a look at the table manners.In China, people use chopsticks to eat and they are supposed to eat without making a noise.But in Japan, it's polite to make a noise when you are eating noodles or drinking tea, because that means the food is delicious and you thank the meal maker.In western countries, people use knife and fork at table.But American table manners are simpler than those in Europe.Western people may use more than one set of knife and fork at dinner.‎ ‎（二 ）假如你是李晨，你的美国笔友Linda打算来中国度假。请你根据下面所给的要点提示给她写一封不少于80词的电子邮件，简单介绍一下中国的风俗与餐桌礼仪。‎ 要点提示：1. 赴宴要准时，见面要微笑、握手。2. 每次不要吃太多。‎ ‎3. 当你吃饱了，对主人的劝菜应礼貌回绝。4. 告辞时，要对主人表示感谢。‎ 要求： Dear Linda, ‎ I’m glad to hear that you will come to my country for vacation. Different countries have different customs and table manners. In China,‎ I’m glad to hear that you will come to my country for vacation. Different countries have different customs and table manners. In China, if you’re invited to dinner, you’re supposed to be on time and shake hands with the host with a smile. While eating, you should not eat too much at a time. It’s good manners to chew with your mouth closed and use a napkin to wipe your mouth sometimes. When you are full but the host still asks you to help yourself to some more food, you should say “Thank you. It’s delicious, but I’m full.” It’s polite to say thanks while leaving.‎ Have a good trip!‎ Yours,‎ Li Chen ‎ ‎ ‎ 教新目标九年级UNIT 11 单元检测题 I．单项选择 1. _______ old man in front of Tom is _______ artist. A. A; an B. A; the C. The; an D. The; a 2.Her room is beautiful. But I don’t think her room is bigger than _______. A. mine B. me C. I D. my 3. Peaceful music in the CD made the students _______ relaxed. A. feel B. feels C. felt D. to feel 4.—Vegetables are good _______ our health. —Yes. I agree _______ you. ‎ A. for; with B. at; with C. for; to D. at; to 5. The more careful you are, the _______ mistakes you will make. A. few B. fewer C. little D. less 6. —Why not John a toy car for his birthday? —Good idea! He is crazy about cars. A. buy B. buying C. to buy D. buys 7. The article is _______ more difficult than that one, but I think I can understand it with the help of a dictionary. A. many B. quite C. very D. a little 8. We usually _______ an English song to have the _______ English lesson. A. start with B. agree with C. come up with D. get along with 9. My father would rather _____ than _____． A．stay at home; to go out B．to stay at home; to go out C．stay at home; go out D．to stay at home; go out 10. —Tell us something about Canada, OK? —I’m sorry. _________ Jack _________ I have ever been there. A. Either; or B. Not only; but also C. Both; and D. Neither; nor II．完形填空 We moved to a new area when our son was in Grade Five. __1__ we moved, we took him to spend half a day at his new school. There he saw his new __2__and teachers. ‎ He enjoyed the visit. During the almost 150-kilometer drive home, he told us that he__3__some of the students the date __4__we would move there. And he had also invited them to visit us. The moving day, __5__Saturday, was a busy day. But we arrived at our new house at noon. About an hour later, kids began to come and soon one of them invited our son to his house to play for the __6__. By the time he returned, he knew where most of the kids lived and all of their family histories. On Monday morning, the door bell rang just before the time he would __7__ school. Then it rang again and again. By the time he was ready, we had eight young boys waiting to walk to school with him on his __8__ day. They all lived near us. I asked them if their parents had sent them. The answers surprised and pleased me, “No, we just came __9__he would have people to walk with.” and “It is the right thing to do.” I think how __10__ those kids are. And how lucky my son is to have them as friends! 1. A. Before B. After C. When D. As soon as 2. A. workmates B. classmates C. cousins D. toys 3. A. has told B. told C. had told D. will tell 4. A. where B. who C. which D. when 5. A. 不填 B. the C. an D. a 6. A. morning B. noon C. afternoon D. day 7. A. leave B. leave for C. play in D. visit 8. A. first B. second C. third D. fourth 9. A. so as to B. so that C. such that D. in order to 10. A. smart B. quiet C. lucky D. kind III.阅读理解 A More than one million children are homeless in the United States. To help them, the 12-year-old Zach Bonner walked hundreds of kilometers from his home city of Tampa to Washington, D.C. “There are still so many children who don’t have homes in this country. It’s terrible. ” Zach explained, “And it is also surprising that most people know little about the problem.” Zach said, “Because of the economic(经济) problem, people are losing their jobs. That’s a reason why they become homeless. ” It took him three years to finish his walk, which he began when he was only eight years old. He walked 20 kilometers a day. He also took books with him to go on with his study by teaching himself. Zach had a long history of helping others. Six years ago a strong storm hit Zach’s home city. He went around his neighborhood with a little red wagon (小车), asking for water and other things to help others. He called his work “From My House to the White House.” He got tens of thousands of dollars for those homeless children. That also made Zach the youngest helper of America. 1. Zach Bonner walked to Washington in order to help those children who________. A. could not go to school B. lost their homes C. got bad illnesses D. were blind or deaf 2. Why did so many children lose their homes according to Zach’s words? A. Parents cannot afford to raise them. B. Schools cannot offer enough help. C. Children like making a living alone. D. People dislike those naughty children. ‎ ‎3. How did Zach go on with his study during the walk to Washington? A. A teacher followed him. B. He studied in schools nearby. C. He taught himself. D. He read books on line. 4. At what age did Zach start his work of helping others? A. Six. B. Seven. C. Nine. D. Twelve. 5. Which is TRUE in America according to the passage? A. Most Americans enjoy the life without children. B. Few Americans want to help homeless children. C. Some Americans dislike the idea of Zach Bonner. D. Many people don’t know many children are homeless. B People have been interested in the color and its effects for hundreds of years. More recently, a research has turned to the question of how different colors can help students learn better. Believe it or not, some colors can affect a child’s IQ（智商）. For example, a simple black and white color scheme may cause IQ to become low, while the good use of the red and the orange may raise it as much as 15 points. Be careful not to use too much, however, a little red is exciting, but too much makes people uncomfortable. Bright yellow is exciting to the brain, while the color green is thought to encourage creativity. Use blue and green to calm yourself. Blue, especially, can cause you to calm down. Something blue in a reading area, for example, may help you focus (集中于) on what you are reading. But too much dark blue can make you sad, so use light blue on walls or large floor areas. ‎ If you are struggling to read, try a different color of paper. According to a study, 80 percent of children who had difficulty in reading improved their understanding when they put something grey or blue over their pages. Do not use bright colors here, as they become difficult to look at after a while. However, use bright colors like red, orange and yellow for important points. These colors attract the eye and may help you notice details. The same color of the walls of a room does not help you focus on your studies, but makes you slow in understanding. Colors, on the other hand, make the senses active and encourage learning. Use primary colors red, yellow and blue in a proper way. Then how do you make your choices of color? It mainly depends on (取决于) your space, the lighting and the function of the room. 6. The color grey may help you . A. read better B. calm down C. raise IQ D. feel creative 7. If you want to remember some important facts, you may use the colors . A. green and blue B. grey and blue C. red and yellow D. black and white 8. Which is the most important when you choose the color for your room? A. Your IQ and abilities. B. The use of your room. C. Your likes and dislikes. D. The location of your room. 9. Which might be the proper title for the passage? A. What should we learn about colors? B. Why are people interested in colors? C. Where should we be careful with colors? D. How do colors affect our learning abilities?‎ IV. 补全对话，其中有一项是多余的 M: You look sad, Lily. What’s wrong with you? W: 1.__________ M: What are your problems? W: Well, I failed in the Chinese exam and I’m not good at it. M: 2.__________ Just try your best and you’ll make progress. Now, do you have any other problems? W: Yeah. 3.__________ He wants to meet me. What should I do? M: If I were you, I wouldn’t go to meet him. W: 4. __________ M: You’d better talk with your parents about it and go to meet him with your parents. W: That’s a good idea. 5.__________ M: You’re welcome. A. But he goes on inviting me to meet him. B. Thanks for your advice. C. I made a friend on the Internet. D. Oh, I’ve got some problems. E. What’s up? F. I am sorry to hear that. V. 任务型阅读 Are you interested in music? Do you like to listen to a piece of pop music or country music during your free time? As we all know, music plays a very important role in our daily life. And today’s topic is still about music. That is how music affects the mind. The study of how music affects the mind has been a subject of interest. Research has ‎ shown that music does have positive effects on our mind. Here are the effects of music on the brain: Improve memory—It is known that music helps increase your concentration (专注) levels, which helps improve memory. Increase problem-solving skills—Listening to Mozart’s music is known to make you smarter. Make learning easier—Have you tried learning the alphabet by giving it a tune (曲调)？ This is what music does. It makes learning easier. Speed healing (治愈)—Music not only diverts (转移) the mind from pain, but also helps bring about certain chemical changes in the brain that help speed the healing process. Music therapy (治疗) is recommended for patients of high blood pressure, heart diseases and even cancer. Remember to listen to music whenever you have time and you’ll be cleverer and healthier. 1. 判断正误：( T 表示正确， F 表示错误) ( )Research has shown that music has no positive effect on our mind. 2. 完成句子： Listening to Mozart’s music can make you _________. 3. 简略回答问题： (A)Can music help speed the healing process? ______________________________________________. (B)What kind of patients is music therapy recommended for? ______________________________________________. 4.将文中画线句子译成汉语： __________________________________________‎ 参考答案： I．1—5 CAAAB 6—10 ADACD 3.【解析】A 本题考查动词不定式的用法。make意为“使；让”，是使役动词，后加省略to的不定式作宾语补足语，故答案选A项。 5. 【解析】B 考查比较级句型。“the + 比较级…，the + 比较级…”；表示“越……越……”。 6. 【解析】A本题考查动词不定式的用法。why not后加省略to的不定式，故选A项。 10. 【解析】 D本题考查并列连词的用法。either …or…意为“或者……或者……”；not only… but also…意为“不但……而且……”；both… and…意为“两者都……”；neither …nor…意为“两者都不……”。根据句意：“请告诉我们有关加拿大的事情好吗？”“对不起，杰克和我都没去过那里”，所以选择答案D。 II. 1—5 ABCDD 6—10 CBABC III. 1—5 BACAD 6-9 ACBD IV. 1—5 DFCAB V. 1 .F 2. smarter 3. (A) Yes, it can (B)The patients of high blood pressure, heart diseases and even cancer 4.调查显示，音乐对我们的智力的确有积极的影响。‎ 人教版初三英语上册知识点总结 九年级英语Unit 7 ‎ ‎1.  tired 累的        tiring 令人疲惫的 ‎    bored 讨厌       boring 令人厌烦/讨厌的 ‎    excited 兴奋的    exciting 令人兴奋/激动的 ‎    amazed 惊讶的    amazing 令人惊讶的 ‎2. education n. 教育  educational 有教育意义的 ‎3. 想要做…：would like to do   想要…：would like sth. ‎ ‎   常用的句型有：‎ ‎   What would you like to do? 你想要做什么？‎ ‎   I would like to visit GuiLin. 我想去参观桂林。‎ ‎   What would you like ?  你想要什么？‎ I would like some tea. 我想来些茶。‎ Would you like to go to my party? 你来不来参加我的晚会？(表邀请) Yes, I’d love/ like to . No, thanks.‎ Would you like some tea or coffee? 你是要点茶还是咖啡？‎ Yes, I’d love/ like. No. thanks.‎ Where would you like to visit/ go? 你想去哪呢？(本单元的重点句型)‎ ‎4.  go on vacation 去度假 ‎    go on a trip 去旅行    go on a picnic 去野炊 ‎5.  hope to do 希望做某事 I hope to go to Beijing. 我希望去北京。‎ ‎   hope (that) + 从句  希望….‎ I hope that I can go to Beijing.我希望我能去北京。‎ ‎      I hope (that) she can pass the test.我希望她能通过考试。‎ ‎6. I love places where the people are friendly. 我喜欢人们友好的地方。‎ ‎ where 关系副词，引导定语从句 ‎ where引导定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词如：the place, the city等 ‎   That is the school where I studied 10 years ago. ‎ 那就是我10年前所就读的学校。‎ ‎7. 不定代词   参看课本P141 ‎ ‎   注：形容词必须放在不定代词、不定副词的后面 ‎8. consider doing考虑做某事 ‎  I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换工作。‎ ‎9. cost (sb.) 钱、时间  The book cost me 10 yuan 这本书花了我10元。‎ ‎10. in general 一般来说， 大体上， 通常 ‎11. be supposed to do 应该做…. === should  如：‎ ‎   Scientists are supposed to know a lot. 科学家们应该知道更多。‎ ‎12. take a trip 去旅行 ‎13. provide sb. with sth 供应某人某物=== provide sth for sb. ‎ ‎   如：They provide us with water.‎ ‎       They provide water for us.‎ ‎14.  how far 问路程　多远 ‎     how old 问年龄　多少岁 ‎     how long 问时间　多久　多长 ‎     how often 问频率　多久一次 ‎15. be away 离开　如：　　I was away 2days ago. 我两天前离开了。‎ ‎    I will be away for a few days.　我将离开一些天。‎ ‎16. inexpensive  adj. 不贵的  反义词　expensive adj. 贵的 ‎17.　 let sb. do 让某人做某事　Let me help you.让我帮你吧。‎ ‎　　　let sb. not do 让某人不要做某Let us not laugh. 让我们不要笑了。‎ ‎18. in the future 将来　‎ She will a good mother in the future. 在将来她将会是一个好妈妈。‎ ‎19. 用to 表示　“的”有： ‎ answers to question 问题的答案　 the key to the door 这扇门的钥匙 ‎20. as soon as possible 尽可能的快 ‎21. continue doing == go on doing 继续做某事　如：‎ ‎   She continued singing. == She went on singing. 她继续唱歌。‎ ‎22. according to 根据 ‎ ‎23. be willing to do 愿意做某事 如： ‎ ‎    I am willing to help you. 我愿意帮你。‎ ‎24. on the other hands 另一方面 ‎25. hold on to sth. 保持，不要放弃 ‎ ‎   Please hold on to my hand. 不要放开我的手。‎ ‎26. come true 实现 如：   My dream have come true. 我的梦实现了。‎ 九年级英语Unit 8‎ 短语动词小结 常见短语动词结构有下面几种：‎ ‎1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜 ‎ 这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动 词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动词和副词之间，也可放 在短语动词后。‎ ‎2. 动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于 ‎   这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。‎ ‎3. 动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出   run out of 用完，耗尽 ‎  4. 动词+名词(介词) 如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住 ‎1.cheer (sb.) up  使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴 ‎  clean up  打扫   clean-up n. 打扫 ‎ ‎2. homeless adj. 无家可归的  a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩 ‎  home  n. 家 ‎ ‎3. hand out  分发  hand out bananas ‎ ‎  give out 分发    give out sth to sb. 分….给某人 ‎  give up doing 放弃…  give up smoking 放弃吸烟 ‎  give away 赠送 捐赠  give away sth. to …. give away money to kids ‎ ‎  give sb. sth. 给某人某东西  give me money 给我钱 ‎  give sth. to sb. 给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线 ‎4. sick  adj. 生病的  作表语、定语 ‎ ‎  ill  adj. 生病的    作表语，不能作定语 ‎5. volunteer to do  v. 志愿效劳、主动贡献  ‎ ‎  volunteer  n. 志愿者 ‎ ‎6. come up with  提出 想出 === think up 想出 ‎  catch up with  赶上 追上 ‎7. put off doing 推迟做某事  put on  穿上 (指过程)  put up  张贴 ‎8. write down 写下  记下 ‎ ‎9. call up 打电话  make a telephone call 打电话 ‎10. set up 成立 建立 ‎ The new hospital was set up in 2000. 这座医院是在2000年成立的。‎ ‎11. each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用 ‎   every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用 ‎12. put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用 ‎   They put the new machine to use. 他们把新机器投入使用 ‎13. help sb. (to) do 帮助某人做某事 help him (to) study ‎   help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做某事 help him with English ‎   help do  帮助做某事  help study ‎ ‎14. plan to do 计划做某事         plan + 从句 ‎   I plan to go to Beijing. === I plan (that) I will go to Beijing. 我计划去北京。‎ ‎15. spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing. ‎ 我花了一天的时间去参观北京。‎ ‎   spend… on sth.  花费…在… I spent 3 years on English. ‎ ‎16.not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分 ‎ ‎  (1)引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。‎ 因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要 把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：‎ ‎    ①Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best. ‎ 我不仅能做到而且做得最好。‎ ‎  ⑵Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：‎ ‎  ①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。‎ ‎  ②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。‎ 常见的就近原则的结构有：‎ ‎     Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不)‎ Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。‎ ‎     Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个)‎ ‎         Either Lily or you are a student. ‎ ‎     Not only …but (also)…‎ ‎     There be ‎ ‎17. join 参加 (指参加团体、组织)  如：join the Party 入党 ‎   take part in 参加 (指参加活动)  如：‎ take part in sports meeting 参加运动会 ‎18. ①run out of == use up 用完 用尽 ‎ I have run out of money.== I have used up money. 我已经用完了钱。‎ ‎   ②run away 逃跑  The monkey has run away from the zoo.‎ 这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。‎ ‎   ③run to + 地方 跑到某地  ‎ ‎19.  take after (在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像 ‎     be similar to 与..相像 ‎     take after 相像     look after 照顾     take care of 照顾 ‎20. work out   算出   结局 ‎    The situation worked out quite well. 情况的结局非常好 ‎   Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗？‎ ‎21. hang out 闲荡 闲逛 ‎ ‎   I like to hang out at mall with my friends. 我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。‎ ‎22. be able to do 能 会    be unable to do 不能 不会 ‎ ‎23. thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如：     thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我 ‎24. for sure  确实如此，毫无疑问 ‎    You don’t have money. That’s for sure. 你没有钱，这是毫无疑问的。‎ ‎25. fill… with… 使…充满…  用…填充…‎ ‎    She filled the bowl with water. 她用水填满碗。‎ ‎26. like  prep. 像… ‎ ‎27. help sb. out 帮助…做事，解决难题(摆脱困境)‎ ‎   I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out. ‎ 我不能算出这道数学问题，请你帮我解决。‎ ‎28. train n. 火车 ‎   train v. 训练 ‎   train sb. to do. 训练某人做某事 ‎   She trains her dog to fetch things. 她训练她的狗去取东西。‎ ‎29. at once == right away 立刻 马上 如：   Do it at once. 马上去做。‎ ‎   I’ll go there at once/ right away. 我马上去那里。‎ ‎30. one day 有一天 (指将来/过去)‎ ‎   some day 有一天(指将来) 如：    One day I went to Beijing. 有一天我去了北京。‎ ‎    Some day I’ll go to Beijing. 有一天我将去北京。‎ ‎31. specially adv. 特意地 专门地 特别地   special adj. 特别的 ‎32. donation n. 捐赠物    donate v. 捐赠 赠送 ‎33. part of speech  词性 词类 ‎34. disabled adj. 肢体有残疾的   disable v. 不能 九年级英语 Unit9‎ ‎1. 被动语态 ‎ ‎(1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。‎ ‎   (2). 被动语态基本结构：be+及物动词的过去分词 ‎(如果是不用物动词，其过去分词应带有相应的介词)‎ ‎   (3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词，有人称、数和时态的变化。‎ ‎       一般现在时被动语态为：am/is/are+过去分词 ‎       一般过去时被动语态为：was/were+ 过去分词 ‎       与情态动词连用的被动语态：情态动词+ be + 过去分词 ‎   (4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语，放在句 末，by 表示“由，被”的意思 如何理解被动语态？‎ ‎ 为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义，可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。‎ ‎ 主动语态： 主语+    谓语动词   +   宾语  + 其他成分 ‎ 被动语态： 主语+  be +过去分词 +  by +宾语   +其他成分 ‎ 如：      Many people  speak  English.‎ 被动语态 English      is spoken   by many people.‎ ‎2. 本单元要掌握的句型 见课本P69 中的Grammar Focus ‎ ‎3. invent v. 发明  inventor n. 发明家  invention n. 发明 可数名词 ‎4. be used for doing用来做…(是被动语态) 如：‎ ‎   Pens are used for writing. 笔是用来写的。 Pens aren’t used for eating. 笔不是用来吃的。‎ ‎5. 给某人某样东西 give sth. to sb.  如：I gave a pen to him. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎   give sb. sth.        I gave him a pen. 我给他一支笔。‎ ‎6. all day 整天 ‎7. salty  adj. 咸的  salt  n. 盐 ‎8. by mistake 错误地 如：‎ ‎  I took the umbrella by mistake. 我不小心拿错了雨伞。‎ ‎9. make sb./sth. +形容词 使…怎么样  It made me happy. 它使我高兴 ‎  make sb./sth. +名词  让…做…     It made me laugh. 它让我发笑 ‎10. by accident 意外 偶然  I met her by accident at bus stop. ‎ 我在公共汽车站意外地见到了她。‎ ‎11. not…until… 直到…才做… 如：‎ I didn’t go to bed until I finished my work.     我直到完成我的工作才去睡觉。‎ ‎12. according to +名词  根据… 如：    according to an legend according to this article根据这篇文章      根据一个神话 ‎13. over an open fire 野饮 ‎ ‎14. leaf  n. 叶子  复数形式 leaves ‎15. nearby adj. 附近的  如： the nearby river ‎16. fall into 落入 掉进 如：The leaf fell into the river. 叶子落入了河里。fall down 摔倒  如：She fell down from her bike. ‎ 她从她自行车摔倒了。‎ ‎17. quite 非常 adv.  与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的后面 ‎ ‎             如：    quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩 ‎   very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的前面 ‎ ‎             如：    a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩 ‎    注：当不与冠词a 连用时，两者可以互用 如：‎ ‎        I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。‎ ‎18. in the way 这样 ‎ ‎19. pleased adj. 表示外部因素引起人发自内心的欣慰和愉快 ‎   pleasant adj. 愉快 高兴 指天气、时间、旅行令人高兴愉快 ‎   please v. 使高兴 使同意 ‎20. battery—operated  adj. 电池控制的是名词+动词的运动分词构成的合成形容词 ‎21. in the sixth century 在第6世纪 ‎ ‎22. travel around 周游 ‎23. more than === over 超过 如：    more than 300 == over 300 超过300‎ ‎24. including  prep. 介词  包括  可以与名词和动名词连用 ‎   如: Six people, including a baby, were hurt.       6个人包括一个小孩受伤了。‎ ‎25. have been played 被上演   是现在完成时的被动语态 ‎   现在完成时的被动语态的结构：have /has been +过去分词 ‎26. be born 出生  He was born in Canada. 他在加拿大出生 ‎27. safety n. 安全 safe adj. 安全的 ‎28. knock into 撞上(某人)‎ ‎29. divide sth. into … 将…划分成..‎ 通常指将一个整体分成几个对应相对的部分 如：‎ Let’s divide ourselves into 4groups. 让我们把我们自己划成4组。‎ ‎30. since then 自从那以后  常与完成时 态连用 如：‎ ‎    Since then, I have left Beijing. 自从那以后，我已经离开了北京。‎ 九年级英语 Unit10‎ ‎1. 过去完成时 ‎(1) 构成：由助动词had + 过去分词 构成 ‎           否定式：had not + 过去分词   缩写形式：hadn’t ‎ ‎  (2) 用法  过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。‎ ‎  (3) 它所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。‎ ‎①表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示 ‎②也可以用when, before, after 等引导的时间状语从句来表示 ‎ ‎    ③还可以通过宾语从句或通过上下文暗示。‎ When I got there, you had already eaten you meal. 当我到达那里时，你已经开始吃了。‎ By the time he got here, the bus had left. 到他到达这里时，汽车已经离开了 ‎2. by the time 直到…时候  ‎ 指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止的一段时间  如：‎ By the time we got to his house, he had finished supper. ‎ 在我们到达他就已经吃完了晚饭。‎ ‎3. 英语中表示“把某物遗忘在某处”常用 leave + 地点 ‎ 而不是forget+地点 如：Unluckily, I left my book at home ‎.                     不幸的是，我把书忘在家里了。‎ ‎4. close  v. 关   adv. 接近地 靠近地    closed  adj. 关的 ‎5. come out 出来 ‎ ‎6. on time 按时 准时 既不早也不迟  in time 及时 指在时限到来之前 ‎7. luckily adv. 幸运地  lucky adj. 幸运的 luck n. 好运 ‎8. give sb. a ride 让某搭便车  如：‎ ‎   He often gives me a ride to school. 他经常让我搭便车去学校。‎ ‎9.only just 刚刚好、恰好 ‎ ‎10. go off  (闹钟)闹响  The alarm went off just now. 刚才警钟响了。‎ ‎11. break down 坏掉 ‎ ‎12. fool  n. 傻子 呆子  v. 愚弄 欺骗 如：   He is a fool. 他是一个呆子。 ‎ ‎   We can’t fool our teach. 我们不能欺骗我们的教师。(动词)‎ ‎13. show up 出现 出席 She didn’t show up last night. 昨晚她没有出现 ‎14. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某做事 如：‎ ‎   My friend invited me to watch TV. 我的朋友邀请我看电视。‎ ‎15. set off 激起 出发 set up 建立 ‎16. ①so … that 如此…以致于 引导结果状语从句，so后面接形容词、副词.‎ ‎②so that作“为了”时，引导目的状语从句，从句常出现情态动词，‎ ‎            作结果状语从句时，从句中一般不用情态动词 。‎ 如：She got up early so that she could catch the bus. ‎ 为了能赶上车，她起得很早。(目的状语从句)‎ ‎ She was so sad that she couldn’t say a word. 她悲伤得一句话也说不出来。(结果状语从句)‎ ‎17. flee from 从…逃跑 避开如：They fled from their home. 他们从他们的家里逃了出来。‎ ‎18. thrill v . 使人非常激动，使人非常紧张 ‎   thrilled  adj. 指某人感到激动或感到紧张 ‎   thrilling  adj. 指某事物使人心情激动 ‎19. get married 结婚 ‎20. convince v. 使信服  convincing adj. 令人信服的 ‎21. land v. 着落 ‎22. be late for 迟到 ‎23. a piece of 一片/块/张 如： a piece of paper/ bread ‎ ‎                            一张纸/ 一块面包 九年级英语Unit11‎ ‎1.宾语从句     宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。‎ ‎  ①由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语　构成 ‎  　常由下面的一些连接词引导：‎ ‎  ②由that 引导  表示陈述意义 that 可省略 ‎     He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎  ③由if , whether 引导  表示一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)‎ ‎      I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. ‎ 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。‎ ‎  ④由连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导  表示特殊疑问意义 ‎      Do you know what he wants to buy?  你知道他想要买什么吗？‎ ‎  ⑤从句时态要与主句一致 ‎    当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态 ‎    He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎    I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ ‎    She wants to know if I have finished my homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ ‎    Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎    当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态(一般过 去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时)‎ ‎    He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。‎ ‎    I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。‎ She wanted to know if I had finished m homework. ‎ 她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。‎ Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？‎ ‎2. get  v.  得到、买、到达 ‎3. make a telephone call 打电话 ‎ ‎4. save money 省钱、存钱 ‎ ‎5. ①问路常用的句子：‎ ‎     Do you know where …is ?‎ ‎     Can you tell me how can I get to …?‎ Could you tell me how to get to …？‎ ‎②Can/Could/Will/Would you please tell me sth. 表示十分客气地询问事情 ‎　③Could you tell me how to get to the park?‎ 请你告诉我怎么才能去邮局好吗？中的how to get to the park ‎ 是疑问词与动词不定式连用，用作宾语，但不是宾语从句，可是 相当于how I can get to the park（宾语从句）如：‎ I don’t know how to solve the problem.  ==‎ ‎ I don’t know how I can solve the problem.我不知道如何解决这个问题 ‎ Can you tell me when to leave?  ==‎ ‎ Can you tell me when I ill leave? 你能告诉我什么时候离开？‎ ‎6. 日常交际用语：‎ ‎  take the elevator / escalator to the … floor.乘电梯/自动扶梯到…楼 ‎  turn left / right === take a left / right  向左/ 右转 ‎  go past 经过    go straight 向前直走 ‎7. next to 旁边、紧接着  如：Lily is next to Ann.  莉莉就在安的旁边。‎ ‎8. between … and… 在…和…之间 ‎ 如: Lily is between Ann and Tom. 莉莉就在安和汤姆的之间。‎ ‎9. decide to do 决定做… She decided to go to have lunch. 她决定去吃午餐。‎ ‎   decide  v.    decision  n.   make a decision  做个决定 ‎10. Is that a good place to hang out? 那是不是一个闲荡的好地方？‎ ‎   中的to hang out修饰前面名词place，不定式作定语. ‎ 如：There are something to eat. 这有吃的东西。中的to eat修饰代词something，作定语.‎ ‎11. kind of +adj./ adv. 译为“有点、一点”‎ 如：   She is kind of shy. 她有点害羞。‎ ‎12. expensive 贵的 反义词 inexpensive 不贵的 ‎13. crowded 拥挤的 反义词 uncrowded 不拥挤的 ‎14. take a vacation == go on a vacation 去度假 ‎15.  dress up 打扮     dress up as 打扮成..‎ ‎    如：He wanted to dress up as Father Christmas.       他想要打扮成圣诞老人。‎ ‎16. on the beach  在海滩上 的介词用 on ‎17. politely  adv. 有礼貌地   polite  adj. 有礼貌的 ‎18. depend on sth / doing / 从句   根据、依靠、依赖、决定于 ‎   Living things depend on the sunlight.生物对阳光有依赖性。‎ ‎   We can’t depend on his answer. 我们不能根据他的回答。‎ ‎   That depends on how you did it. 那决定于你怎样做这件事。‎ ‎19. prefer动词  更喜欢 宁愿  常用的结构有：‎ ‎   prefer sth. 更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。‎ ‎   prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。‎ ‎   prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats. ‎ 与猫相比我更喜欢狗。‎ ‎   prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着 ‎   prefer to do rather than do 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事 ‎ ‎     I prefer to work rather than be free. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲着。‎ ‎20. on the other hand  另一方面 ‎21. 把…借给某人lend sb. sth. ＝  lend sth.to sb. 如：‎ ‎ Lily lent me her book. == Lily lent her book to me .莉莉把她的书借给了我。‎ ‎22. such as ‎23. I’m sorry to do sth. 对做某事我觉得很抱歉、伤心。‎ ‎24. in a way 在某种程度说 ‎25. in order to do  为了做…  表目的如：‎ ‎ He got up early in order to catch the first bus.‎ ‎  他起早床，是为了赶上头班公共汽车。‎ ‎26. 等级/同级比较：as…as ， not as/so…as ‎①as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as  ‎ 表示“和…一样的…”“…和…一样的…” ‎ ‎   　如：　He works as hard as we. 他工作和我们同样努力。‎ ‎   ②否定式：not as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎ ‎== not so + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as ‎      He doesn’t work as / so hard as we. 他工作没有我们那样努力。‎ ‎27. hand in 上交 九年级英语Unit12‎ ‎1. be supposed to do .　应该　如：  We are supposed to stop smoking. 我们应该停止吸烟。‎ ‎　知识拓展　表示应该的词有：should, ought to ,be supposed to ‎ ‎2. shake hands　握手　　shake 本意是“摇动、震动”‎ ‎3. You should have asked what you were supposed to wear.‎ 你本应该问清楚怎么样穿才得体。中的“should have asked”是 ‎“情态动词＋现在完成时”表示过去本应该做某事，事实上没有做 如：She should have gone to Beijing. 她本应该去了北京。（没有去）‎ ‎4. be relaxed about sth.　对某事随意、不严格　如：‎ ‎　　They are relaxed about the time. 他们对时间很随意。‎ ‎5. pretty 　adv. 相当,很＝very　She is pretty friendly. 她相当友好。‎ ‎          adj. 美丽的     She is a pretty girl.她是一个美丽的女孩。‎ ‎6. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事　如：‎ ‎　She has made plans to go to Beijing.==She has planed to go to Beijing.‎ ‎7. drop by 访问　看望　拜访　串门 ‎　　We just dropped by our friends’ homes.我们刚刚去朋友家串门。‎ ‎8. on time 按时 ‎9.　after all 毕竟　终究　如：　　　You see I was right after all.你看，毕竟还是我对了。‎ ‎10. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事　如：‎ ‎　　　Lily invited me to have dinner.莉莉请我吃晚饭。‎ ‎11. without 没有 ‎12. around the world == all over the world 全世界 ‎13. pick up 捡起　挑选　如：He picked up his hat. 他捡起他的帽子。‎ ‎14. start doing == start to do 开始做某事　如 ‎　　He started reading.== He started to read. 他开始读。‎ ‎15. point at 指向　‎ ‎16. stick v. 剌　截　　n. 棒，棍　‎ ‎   chopstick 筷子　是由chop(砍)＋stick(棒)合成，通常用复数形式：chopsticks ‎17. go out of one’s way to do 特意，专门做某事　如：‎ ‎　　He went out of his way to make me happy. 他特意使我高兴。‎ ‎18. make mistakes 犯错误（复数）make a mistake 犯错误（一个）‎ ‎19. be different from 与…不同　　如：‎ ‎　　　Chinese food is different from theirs. 中国菜与他们的不同.‎ ‎20.  get/be used to sth. 习惯于…‎ get/be used to doing　习惯于…‎ ‎  　   be used to do 　　被用于做…‎ ‎        be used for doing　被用于做…‎ ‎           used to do 过去常常做…　如： ‎ I wash clothes everyday. But I’m used to it.‎ 我每天都洗衣服，但我习惯了 I am used to washing clothes. 我习惯于洗衣服了。‎ ‎     The knives are used to cut things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎     The knives are used for cutting things. 小刀被用来切东西。‎ ‎　   She used to watch TV after school. 她过去放学后常常看电视。‎ ‎21. 我发现要记住每一样事是困难的。‎ I find it difficult to remember everything. ‎ ‎ 形式宾语　　  真正宾语 常见的形式宾语有：　　find / think + it/them +形容词 to do sth. 如：‎ ‎　           I think it hard to study English.‎ ‎22. cut up 切开　切碎　如：Let’s cut up the water melon. 让我们切开这个西瓜吧。‎ ‎23. make a toast 敬酒 ‎24. crowd  v.挤满  其形容词和过去式及过去分词都是：crowded ‎25. set n. 一套　　v. 设置 ‎26. can’t stop doing 忍不住做某事　I can’t stop laughing. 我忍不住笑 ‎27. make faces　做鬼脸　　‎ ‎28.　face to face 面对面 ‎29. learn…by oneself 自学　如：　　　I learn English by my self. 我自学英语。‎ Unit 13 Rainy days make me sad.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. I’d rather go to the Blue Lagoon Restaurant... (P102)我宁愿去Blue Lagoon餐厅，……‎ would rather意为“宁愿……”，表示句子主语的愿望、选择，后接省去to的不定式。‎ He’d rather join you in the English Group. 他宁愿加入到你的英语小组中来。‎ Which would you rather have, bread or rice? 面包和米饭，你更喜欢哪一个？‎ 如果表示“宁愿（可）……也不愿……”则用句型would rather...than...。在would rather和than后面所连接的两个对比部分一般要一致。‎ The brave soldier would rather die than give in.那个勇敢的士兵宁死不屈。‎ He’d rather work than play. 他宁愿工作也不愿玩。‎ They preferred to die of hunger rather than take his bread.‎ 他们宁愿饿死也不愿接受他的面包。 ‎ ‎2. Loud music makes me happy. (P103)嘈杂的音乐使我很开心。‎ Loud music always makes me want to dance. (P103)嘈杂的音乐总是使我想去跳舞。‎ 这两句是动词make的使役用法，make me后分别接了形容词和不定式短语。make的这种用法常见于以下结构：‎ ‎◎ make+名词（代词）+省略to的动词不定式 My parents often make me do some other homework. 我父母常让我做些其他的作业。‎ 特别提示 这一结构中的不定式短语在主动结构中是宾语补足语，必须省去to，变为被动结构时，不定式短语作主语补足语，这时必须带to。‎ She was made to work for the night shift. 她不得不上夜班。‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+-ed分词短语 What made them so frightened?什么使他们这样害怕？‎ Can you make yourself understood in English?你能用英语把意思表达清楚吗？‎ ‎◎make+名词/代词+介词短语或名词短语 She made him her assistant. 她委派他做自己的助手。‎ Sit down and make yourselves at home, everyone.大家请坐，不要拘束。‎ ‎◎make+名词（代词）+形容词或形容词短语。‎ The good news made us happy. 这条好消息使我们很高兴。‎ ‎3. ... small restaurants can serve many people every day. (P104)……小饭店每天就可以多接待些顾客。‎ 句中的serve 有“服侍，侍候，招待”等意思，常用于以下结构中：‎ ‎◎ serve+宾语 They were busy serving the day’s last buyers.他们正忙着接待这天的最后一批顾客。‎ Nobody can serve two masters. 一人不能侍奉二主。‎ ‎◎ serve sb sth, 或serve sth to sb Mrs Turner served us a very good dinner.‎ ‎=Mrs Turner served a very good dinner to us.‎ 特纳太太招待我们吃了一顿丰盛的晚餐。‎ ‎ ◎ serve sb with sth We served them with beer and wine. 我们用啤酒和红酒招待他们。‎ ‎4. However, some advertising can be confusing or misleading. (P106)可是，一些广告可能会混淆黑白或误导消费。‎ confusing与misleading是两个现在分词，相当于形容词，意思分别是“感到混消的”和“误导的”‎ ‎，在句中作表语，主语通常是表示物的名词或代词，如本句中的用法；也可以用作定语，既可修饰表示人的名词或代词，也可以修饰表示物的名词或代词。‎ They can be some confusing or misleading advertisements.‎ 它们可能是一些混淆黑白或误导消费的广告。‎ What he said made us confusing.他说的话令我们感到困惑。‎ ‎5. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.(P106) 有时，一则广告会诱导你去买你根本就不需要的东西。‎ at times意为“有时，不时”，与sometimes同义。两者在句中的位置较灵活，可位于句首，句中或句末。‎ At times I make mistakes when I speak English. 我说英语时有时会出错。‎ They went to town at times during the cold winter.在寒冷的冬天，他们有时候进城去。‎ Sometimes they walk to school. 有时候，他们步行上学。‎ He sometimes plays football with his friends. 他有时和朋友一起踢足球。‎ ‎6. To start with, it was raining, and rainy days make me sad. (P107)起初，天在下雨，雨天使我心情很不好。‎ ‎◎ start with作“首先”解时，只用于动词不定式，在句中常常以插入语的形式出现。‎ To start with, the computer room must be kept very clean.‎ 首先，计算机工作室必须保持清洁。‎ Our group had five members, to start with.刚开始，我们小组只有五个人。‎ ‎◎ start with可表示“从……开始”；“先从某事做起”‎ ‎，与begin...with是同义词组。反义词组是end with“以……结束”。‎ He started/began with the aim of injuring others only to end up by ruining himself.他本想损害别人，结果只害了自己。‎ The meeting ended with a speech given by the chairman.会议以主席的讲话结束。‎ He wanted to start/begin with the smallest country and end with the largest one.‎ 他打算先去最小的国家，最后去最大的国家。‎ ‎◎ start单独使用时，意为“开始”，可用作及物动词或不及物动词。用作及物动词时，其后跟名词、代词，也可跟动词不定式或动名词形式。begin是start的同义词，两者在用法上没有很大差别，只是start侧重动作的突然开始。‎ As soon as we got there, it started raining.我们一到那儿就下雨了。‎ When did we start/begin this lesson?我们是什么时候开始讲这一课的？‎ ‎7. ...some people would rather just give money.(P108)……有些宁愿只给钱。‎ 句中的would rather是would rather...than...的省略形式，意为“宁愿……而不……”，表示主观愿望。使用这一结构，要注意两个比较的部分对等。‎ You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a party.‎ 你宁愿待在家里看一本好书也不愿去参加舞会。‎ I would rather have the small one than the big one.我宁愿要小的，不要大的。‎ 特别提示 比较的部分如果是动词，than后应是动词原形。‎ ‎8. I prefer to receive a gift... (P108)我宁愿接受一件……礼物。‎ prefer表示选择时，可用两种句型。‎ ‎（1）prefer+名词或动名词+to+名词或动名词。‎ They prefer red to blue.与蓝色相比，他们更喜欢红色。‎ I preferred doing something to doing nothing.我喜欢做点什么，而不喜欢闲着。‎ ‎（2）prefer+不定式或名词+rather than+不带to的动词不定式。‎ He preferred to walk there rather than go by bus.‎ 他喜欢走着去那儿，不喜欢乘公共汽车。‎ She prefers to read rather than sit idle.她喜欢读书而不愿闲坐着。‎ Unit 14 Have you packed yet?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Sorry I couldn’t get back to you sooner. (P112)很抱歉我没能尽快给你回复。‎ 这是在E-mail message回复中的常用语,句中“get back to sb”的意思是“以后再答复”。‎ I can’t give you a definite answer now but I’ll get back to you about it soon.‎ 我现在不能给你一个明确的回答，但我很快会给你答复的。‎ ‎2. In the past twelve months, they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD. (P114)在过去的十二个月里，他们举办了三场较大的音乐会，出版了一张很受欢迎的CD唱片。‎ ‎（1）“in the past+时间段”常用于完成时的句子中，表示“在过去的……时间里”，past是形容词，可以用last来替换，而past/last的后面通常要使用“数字+名词”的结构。‎ In the past/last two years, she has studied English very hard.‎ 在过去的两年里，她一直在努力地学英语。‎ ‎（2）短语make a hit表示“大获成功”、“（演出等）大受欢迎；受到赞扬”等，hit是名词，表示成功而风行一时的事物，如电影，歌曲，演出等。‎ Zhou Jielun has just made a hit CD. 周杰伦刚出版了一盘轰动一时的CD。‎ His song was a great hit. 他的歌曲轰动一时。‎ He made a great hit in teaching. 他曾在教学上获得了巨大的成功。‎ ‎3. And then they’re going to go on a world tour in which they will perform in ten different cities. (P114)然后，他们将去世界各地旅行并在十个城市巡回演出。‎ ‎...in which they will perform in ten different cities是定语从句，先行词是tour,在关系代词which前介词in通常的位置是在动词perform的后面。本句为了避免与in two different cities短语中的in重复，将perform后的第一个in前置。句中perform主要指扮演角色，演奏某种乐器，演出某一节目，侧重能力，技巧，效果，可用作及物动词和不及物动词。‎ The magician performed wonderful tricks. 魔术师表演了精彩的魔术。‎ He performs perfectly on the piano. 他的钢琴演奏太棒了。‎ ‎4. Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you — if you can get tickets, that is.‎ ‎ (P114)如果他们来到你附近的城市，千万不要错过——当然，如果你能弄到票的话。‎ ‎（1）句中的that is表示“确切地；换句话说；也就是”，用来表达一个准确的说法，即对前面的内容加以准确地说明。‎ She’s a housewife — when she’s not teaching English, that is.‎ 她是个家庭主妇——是指她不教英语的时候。‎ ‎（2）句中miss是“错过”，后接名词、代词或v-ing形式，不可接不定式。‎ They missed the train by two minutes.他们差两分钟没赶上火车。‎ I came late and missed seeing the beginning of the movie.‎ 我来晚了，没有看见电影的开始部分。‎ miss还可表示“丢失”、“失去”，与lose同义。‎ ‎5. ...but we really hope to have a number one hit some day. (P114)……但是我们真的希望有朝一日我们制作出能卖得最好的一首歌。‎ some day意为“将来某一日”，等于someday,与one day是近义词。some day/someday只表示将来，不表示过去。而one day用在过去时的句子里是“有一天”的意思，用在将来时的句子里是“将有一天”，与some day/someday可互换。‎ He will be a scientist some day.总有一天他会成为科学家。‎ I hope to see you one day/someday.我希望有一天会看到你。‎ One day last summer they made a trip to the country.‎ 去年夏天某日他们到乡间旅行。‎ 试译：你一定要有一天来看我。‎ You must come one day to see me.‎ You must come some day to see me.‎ You must come to see me someday.‎ 魔力纠错 他有一天来看了我。‎ 误：He came some day to see me.‎ 正：He came one day to see me.‎ ‎6. ...as a part of the “In Search of Roots” summer camp program. (P116)……作为“寻根”夏令营活动的一部分。‎ in search for是固定短语,for 后面的名词同样必须是“寻找的目标”，不是“搜寻的对象”。search前常出现a 或one’s等词对search加以限定或修饰，这个短语也常作目的状语。‎ The soldiers were sent in a search for the missing aircraft. ‎ 士兵们被派去搜寻失踪的飞机。‎ So far, they have been unlucky in their search for gold and have no money at all.‎ 到现在为止，他们寻找金子的运气一直不好，而且他们身上也没钱了。‎ 知识拓展 search的基本用法 ‎（1）search的动词用法。‎ ‎◎ search不与介词或副词搭配时是及物动词，表示“搜查”的意思，其后通常接处所或人物名词，表示搜查的对象。‎ He even searched my home without any reason.‎ 他甚至毫无理由地搜查了我的家。‎ I’ve searched my memory, but can’t remember that man’s name.‎ 我苦思良久，仍然记不起那人的名字。‎ They searched every part of the building. 他们对全楼进行了搜查。‎ ‎◎ search用不及物动词，后面接介词for 和after，构成及物性动词短语，两者是“搜寻，寻找”的意思，表示花费极大的气力去搜寻某个特定的目标，常含有对立或不对立的意味，两者可以通用，只不过search for 更常见些。‎ For a whole day they searched for/after the lost child.‎ 他们找了一天这个丢失的孩子。‎ ‎7. ...and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students... (P116) ……到目前为止，它带来了成千上万的海外华裔学生……‎ so far 意思是“到目前为止”，常用于完成时，表示动作从过去开始一直延续到现在，强调到目前为止的情况,可位于句首，也可位于句末。‎ So far, no man has traveled farther than the moon.‎ 到现在为止，还没有人到过比月球更远的地方。‎ How many travelers have been to Disneyland so far?‎ 到现在为止有多少旅客到过迪斯尼乐园？‎ So far we haven’t got any news from them.‎ 到目前为止，我们还没有得到他们的任何消息。‎ ‎8. Most, like Robert, can hardly speak any Chinese, and have never been to China before. (P116) 像罗伯特一样，大多数人几乎都不会说中文，而且以前从来没有到过中国。‎ ‎（1）hardly是一个否定副词，表示“几乎不，简直不”，相当于almost not，含有否定的意义，故在句中不能另加否定词。切莫将hardly误认为是由hard+ly构成的副词。此外，hardly 位于句首时，要用倒装语序。‎ I hardly know what to say. 我简直不知道说什么好。‎ Hardly can I move this heavy desk. 我简直移不动这张重桌子。‎ ‎— Can you catch what I said?你能听懂我说的话吗？‎ ‎— Sorry, I can hardly understand it.对不起，我几乎听不懂。‎ ‎（2）have been后面接to表示某人“去过某地，现在已经回来了”，可用于各种人称。‎ Have you ever been to Shanghai? 你曾经去过上海吗？‎ He has been to America twice. 他到美国去过两次。‎ ‎【友情链接】have gone to与have been in的用法 have gone 表示某人“去某地了”，不论是在途中还是到了目的地，重点是强调这个人已经不在说话人所在的地方了，常用于第三人称；have been in，则表示一直“呆在某个地方”，常与表示一段时间状语连用。‎ Henry has gone to London. 亨利到伦敦去了。‎ They have been in Beijing for two weeks. ‎ 他们在北京已经有两个星期了。‎ ‎10. Thanks to In Search of Roots... (P116)多亏“寻根”……‎ ‎【知识归纳】thanks, thanks to与thanks for的用法 ‎◎ thanks是名词thank的复数形式，意为“感谢”。表示“感谢”之意，可以说：‎ Thanks a lot.‎ Many thanks.‎ A thousand thanks.‎ ‎◎ thanks to是介词词组，后面可以接名词或代词，意为“多亏”；“由于”，在句中作原因状语。‎ Thanks to the old man, we found the lost child at last.‎ 多亏那个老人，我们最后找到了失踪的孩子。‎ ‎◎ thanks for用于对别人已做的事表示感谢，后接名词，代词，或v-ing形式。‎ Thanks for sending me such a nice present.谢谢你寄来这么好的礼品。‎ A thousand thanks for your help.非常感谢你的帮助。‎ Unit 15 We’re trying to save the manatees!‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. In 1972, it was discovered that they are endangered.(P119) 1972年，人们发现它们已经濒于灭绝。‎ was discovered是一般过去时的被动语态，discover“发现”，近义词为find和invent。‎ ‎【友情链接】discover, invent与find ‎◎discover指发现过去所不知道的东西，新奇或意外的东西。‎ Coal was first discovered and used in China.‎ 中国首先发现并使用了煤。‎ Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October, 1492.‎ ‎1492年10月12日，哥伦布发现了美洲。‎ ‎◎invent意为“发明”，即创造出以前从未存在过的东西。‎ Edison invented the electric lamp.爱迪生发明了电灯。‎ Radio had just been invented then.那时无线电刚刚发明出来。‎ ‎◎find意为“找到”，侧重于找到过去丢失的人或物，但有时也表示凭经验或偶然发现了一种东西。‎ Today, corn is found all over the world.今天，全世界都有了玉米。‎ She found him a very good pupil.她发现他是个非常好的学生。‎ ‎◎有时find和discover可以互相替代，意思相同。‎ His notebook was found/discovered in the desk.‎ 他的笔记本是在课桌里找到的。‎ ‎2. Some of the swamps have become polluted. (P119)一些沼泽地受到了污染。‎ have become polluted 中的become是连系动词，polluted是过去分词。这种“系动词+过去分词”结构，意思上也接近被动语态。‎ The slodier got wounded(接近were wounded)in the battle.‎ 这几名战士在这场战斗中受了伤。‎ A few minutes later, the ground became/was covered with snow.‎ 几分钟后地上尽是雪。‎ ‎3. They provide homes for many endangered animals... (P120)他们为许多濒临灭绝的动物提供家园……‎ provide是及物动词，意为“提供”，“供给”。表示“提供……人……物件”是provide...with...；“提供……给……人”是provide...for...。‎ The school provides us with all the materials we need.‎ 学校提供我们所需要的一切资料。‎ We are provided with everything we need for work.‎ 我们被提供了工作所需要的一切。‎ The school provides all the books we need for us.‎ 学校为我们提供我们需要的书籍。‎ ‎【友情提示】‎ ‎◎ provide for是“供养”的意思。‎ He has a large family to provide for. 他要养活一个大家庭。‎ ‎4. ...and help to educate the public about caring for them. (P120)……并且帮助教育公众关爱它们。‎ care for表示“喜欢”，“关心”之意，后接名词或v-ing形式作宾语，take care of也有这个意思。‎ He cared nothing for skating. 他对滑冰没有兴趣。‎ In our class, we care for each other. 在我们班上，我们相互关心。‎ Maria takes good care of everybody. 玛丽亚很关心大家。‎ ‎【友情链接】care for还可以表示“照顾”，“照料”，相当于take care of或look after。‎ At night he fed and cared for the cattle. 夜里他照料牲口，给牲口喂食。‎ You must care for yourselves.‎ ‎=You must look after yourselves.‎ 你们要照顾好自己。‎ The children are well cared for in the nurseries.‎ ‎=The children are taken good care of in the nurseries.‎ 孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。‎ ‎5. turn off the shower while you are washing your hair. (P121)洗头的时候关掉淋浴。‎ ‎（1）turn off表示“关掉”，用在关掉收音机，煤气，自来水等场合。与其相关的几个短语是turn on“打开”，turn down“关小”，turn up“开大”。‎ ‎（2）句中while与when是同义词，都可以用从属连词，引导状语从句表示时间，意思都是“当（在）……的时候”，但二者之间是有区别的。‎ ‎【友情链接】while与when的用法 ‎◎ when的含义是at or during the time that,既可用于指一点时间（从句的谓语动词需用终止性动词），也可用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词用延续性动词），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作或状态能同时发生，或一先一后发生。‎ He wants to help people when they are ill.‎ 他想在人们生病的时候帮助他们。‎ When he got to Shanghai, the ship had already set off.‎ 他到达上海时，轮船已经开走了。‎ ‎◎ while的含义是during the time that,只能用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作只能同时发生，不能一先一后发生。‎ While I was reading, my mother was washing clothes.‎ 我读书时，妈妈在洗衣服。‎ ‎◎这两个词还可以用作并列连词。when表示“在那时”或“这时突然”，相当于and just at that time的意思，用来连接两个并列分句，有时when分句之前有逗号把前后两个分句分开。‎ I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.‎ 我一直呆到太阳下山，这时天开始下雨了。‎ ‎◎ while意为“而”，“却”，表示对照关系。‎ Some like collecting stamps, while others like planting flowers.‎ 有些人喜欢集邮，而有些人却喜欢种花。‎ ‎6. You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne. (P122) 你可能从来没有听说过Amy Winterbourne。‎ ‎【知识归纳】hear, hear from, hear of与hear that clause的用法：‎ ‎（1）hear单独使用表示“听见”，“听到”，常用的结构有：‎ ‎◎ hear sb/sth“听到某人或某物的声音”。‎ I can’t hear you at all. 我根本就听不到你的声音。‎ Haven’t you heard anything? 难道你没有听到什么声音？‎ ‎◎ hear sb do sth“听到某人做某事”。‎ I often hear Li Ping read English in the morning.‎ 我经常在早晨听到李平读英语。‎ ‎◎ hear sb doing sth“听到某人正在做某事”。‎ I heard him singing in the next room.我听见他正在隔壁房间里唱歌。‎ 特别提示 hear sb do sth指听到整个行动或整个事件；而hear sb doing sth是指听到了行动的一部分，有正在发生的意思。试比较：‎ I heard the boy go down the stairs.我听到这个男孩走下楼去。‎ I heard the boy going down the stairs我听到这个男孩下楼的声音。‎ ‎（2）hear from意为“收到……的信”；“得到……消息”。‎ How often do you hear from your father? 你每隔多久收到你父亲的信？‎ Have you still not heard from him? 你还没有收到他的信吗？‎ I haven’t heard from him since he telephoned.‎ 自从他打电话以来，我一直没有他的消息。‎ 特别提示 hear from的宾语是表示人的名词或代词，而不是表示信件的名词。‎ 魔力纠错 我们好几个星期未收到他的信了。‎ 误：We haven’t heard from his letter for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t heard from him for weeks.‎ 正：We haven’t got a letter from him for weeks.‎ ‎（3）hear of意为“听说”，后面接名词，代词或动名词。‎ I’ve never heard of that before.我以前从未听说过那件事。‎ She disappeared and was never heard of again. ‎ 她不知去向了，再未听到她的消息。‎ ‎（4）hear接从句，是“听说”的意思。‎ One day, the Smiths heard that there was a good doctor in a town not far ‎ away.‎ 一天，史密斯一家听说不远的镇里有一位好医生。‎ I hear that one of the pandas has a baby.‎ 我听说其中一只熊猫生了个熊猫宝宝。‎ ‎7. She is a most unusual woman. (P122)她是一个十分不寻常的女性。‎ ‎【知识归纳】a most, the most与most的用法 ‎（1）a most的用法。在“a most+形容词+名词”结构中，most是副词，意为“很，非常”，相当于very,用来修饰它后面的形容词，本句就是这一用法。‎ Guilin is a most beautiful city.桂林是座非常美丽的城市。‎ This is a most interesting story.这是一个非常有趣的故事。‎ ‎（2）the most 的用法 ‎◎在“the most+形容词+名词”结构中,most 是副词，表示程度，意为“最”，与其后的形容词一起构成形容词的最高级。‎ He is one of the most famous writers in China. 他是中国最著名的作家之一。‎ This is the most difficult (one) of the three. 这是这三者中最难的。‎ ‎◎在“动词+the most”结构中，most 也是副词，其作用和意思是“最”其位置通常在动词后。‎ They like English the most. 他们最喜欢英语。‎ ‎（3）most 通常有三种用法 ‎◎在“most+副词或形容词”结构中，most 是副词，意为“很，非常，十分”。‎ I shall most certainly go there. 我十分肯定会到那里去。‎ ‎◎在“most+名词”结构中，most 是形容词，意为“大部分的，大多数”或“最多的”。‎ Most students like English. 大多数学生喜欢英语。‎ Who has (the) most books among you?你们中谁的书最多？‎ ‎8. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together. (P122) 墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的。‎ be made from/of意为“由……（原料）制成”，后面一般接物质名词。接from则表示某物品制成后，已看不出原材料是什么，原材料在制作过程中已起了化学变化；接of表示某物品制成后，仍可看得出原材料，其原料在制作过程中仅起了物理变化。‎ Nylon is made from air, coal and water.尼龙是由空气，煤和水加工制成的。‎ Wine is made from grapes. 葡萄酒是由葡萄制成的。‎ The desk is made of wood. 这桌子是由木头做的。‎ The shoes are made of cloth.这鞋子是用布做的。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ be made up of表示某物或某组织由一种种成分或一个个成员组成。‎ The world is made up of matter.世界是由物质构成的。‎ A TV set is made up of hundreds of different parts.‎ 电视机是由数百个不同的零件组装成的。‎ ‎◎ be made into意为“把……做成……”，主语在意义上为原材料，介词宾语在意义上为制成品。‎ Bamboo is also made into paper.竹子也可以用来造纸。‎ ‎◎be made in意思是“在……（地点）制造”，介词in后接产地。‎ This kind of computer is made in the USA．这种电脑是美国制造的。‎ This printing machine was made in Beijing.这台印刷机是北京生产的。‎ ‎◎be made by意思是“由……制造”，介词by后跟动作的执行者。‎ This model ship is made by Uncle Wang. 这个轮船模型是由王叔叔制作的。‎ ‎9. Amy recently won an award from the Help Save Our Planet Society. (P122)艾米最近获得了“救助地球”协会的奖励。‎ ‎（1）recently 表示“最近”，既可以用于表示一段时间，也可以表示一点时间，多用于完成时态。‎ Have you hear from Michael recently?你最近接到迈克尔的来信吗？‎ Recently he has made quite a few mistakes. 最近他出了不少错。‎ ‎（2）won a award中award是 “奖”的意思，相关词语有prize，reward和scholarship，这几个词都与“奖”有关。‎ ‎（3）句中的win表示“赢”奖的意思。‎ At the national amateur song-writing contest, he won a first-class award.‎ 在全国业余作曲比赛中，他获得了一等奖。‎ win可表示“赢得比赛，战斗”等，宾语一般是比赛，竞赛，战争等名词，与beat近义。‎ 知识拓展 win与beat的用法 两者在表示“赢”，“胜”的意思时，后面所接的宾语有所不同。“赢比赛或一场战斗”用win；“赢某人”是beat。‎ ‎ We won the match months ago. 几个月前，我们赢得那场比赛。‎ Which side won the battle? 这一战谁打胜了？‎ But still we weren’t sure we could beat them.‎ 但是我们还不能肯定我们能打赢他们。‎ Dick beat John and won the game. 狄克打败了约翰，赢得了比赛。人教版新目标英语9年级unit10-12‎ Unit 10 By the time I got outside,the bus had already left.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. When I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home. (P76)我到学校时才发现把书包落在家了。‎ ‎(1)had left my backpack at home 这是一个过去完成时的句子，表示在过去某一时间或某一动作之前完成的动作或存在的状态。‎ By three o’clock yesterday afternoon we had finished the work.‎ 到昨天下午三点，我们已经完成了工作。‎ She had learned a lot of English before she went to school. ‎ 在上学之前，她已经学会了很多英语。‎ ‎(2)left是leave的过去式，在此处意为“遗忘”，“忘记”，后面常有地点状语。‎ Li Min left his dictionary in the reading-room yesterday. ‎ 昨天李民把词典忘在阅览室里了。‎ 特别提示 forget作“遗忘”解时，后面没有“遗忘”的地点。‎ I have forgotten the book. 我忘记拿书了。‎ ‎2. My alarm clock didn’t go off, and by the time I woke up, my father had already gone into the bathroom and I had to wait for him to come out. (P78)我的闹钟坏了，因此等我醒来的时候，我父亲已经进去洗澡了，我只好等他出来。‎ ‎(1)go off 是“（闹钟）闹响”的意思，即“发出声音”。‎ The thieves ran away when the burglar alarm went off. ‎ 防盗警报器一响，窃贼立刻逃走了。‎ ‎(2)by the time I woke up 中的by the time意为“到……的时候”。‎ By the time he was ten, Tom built a chemistry lab himself. ‎ 等到了十岁的时候，汤姆自己建了一个化学实验室。‎ ‎3. I started walking, but I knew I couldn’t get to school on time. (P78)我开始步行，但我知道我已经不能按时到达学校了。‎ ‎(1)start to do sth和start doing sth都表示“开始做某事”，常可相互替换。‎ At the age of 12, he started writing his own newspaper.‎ ‎= At the age of 12, he started to write his own newspaper.‎ 他十二岁时，开始编写自己的报纸。‎ ‎(2)on time在本句中意为“准时，按规定的时间不早也不迟”。‎ Li Ming’s father seldom goes work on time. 李明的父亲很少准时上班。‎ The party began on time that evening. 晚会在那天下午准时举行。‎ 知识拓展 time表示“……次/倍”时，是可数名词，其复数形式为times。‎ How many times did you see the movie? 那部电影你看了几遍？‎ I have four times as many books as you.我的书是你的4倍。‎ 特别提示 in time意为“及时”。‎ I will try my best to finish it in time. 我会尽力及时完成。‎ Will you be home in time to see the children before they go to bed? ‎ 你来得及在孩子们上床睡觉之前赶回家看看他们吗？‎ 短语链语 all the time始终、总是, at any time在任何时候, at the same time同时, by the time在……时候以前, from time to time偶尔, have a good/bad time过得快乐/不快乐, in no time立刻, in time及时, many a time屡次, at times有时, take one’s time慢慢来\别着急, The Times《泰晤士报》（英国一大报）, two times three 2乘以3‎ ‎4. Luckily, my friend Tony and his dad came by in his dad’s car and they gave me a ride. (P78)幸运的是，我的朋友托尼和他的爸爸乘他爸爸的小车过来了，带了我一程。‎ ‎(1)luckily是个副词，意为“幸运地，有运气地”，在句中常用作状语。‎ Luckily, he didn’t hurt himself when he fell. 算他运气好，跌倒了没有受伤。‎ Luckily, she was in when I called. 真走运，我打电话时她正好在。‎ ‎(2)give sb a ride意为“让人搭便车”，其中ride是名词。‎ Please give me a ride to my school, I’m going to be late.‎ 请把我带到学校去，我要迟到了。‎ If you go to station, I can give you a ride. 如果你去车站，我可以带你一程。‎ ‎5. When I got to school, the final bell was ringing. I only just made it to my class. (P78)我到学校的时候，上课铃正在响。我刚好正点赶到教室上课。‎ ‎(1) final bell在此处作“上课铃”解，有时也写为second bell，而“预备铃”则表示为first bell。‎ ‎(2) made it在这里表示“到达、赶上”的意思。‎ You can make it if you hurry. 如果你快一点的话，就会按时赶到的。‎ ‎6. Have you ever forgotten to bring your homework to school? (P78)你是否曾经忘记将作业带到学校了呢？‎ ‎(1)ever在这里是“曾经”的意思,常用于现在完成时里，询问对方是否有过某种经历。 ‎ Have you ever been to London? 你曾经去过伦敦吗？‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ever用于一般疑问句、否定句以及表示条件或比较的从句中，意为“在（以往）任何时候”，“从来”，“在某时”等。‎ Nowadays he hardly ever comes. 最近他几乎不来了。‎ None of us will ever forget that exciting scene. ‎ 我们大家永远都不会忘记那个令人激动的场面。‎ ‎◎ever用于特殊疑问句中，意为“究竟、到底”。‎ Which ever do you want? 你究竟要哪一个？‎ When ever did you lose it? 你究竟什么时候丢失这个东西的？‎ ‎◎ever用于含有最高级的从句中，可用来加强语气。‎ Li Siguang is the greatest scientist that ever lived.李四光是古今最伟大的科学家。‎ 短语链语 ‎◎ever after“从那以后”‎ They lived happily ever after. 从那以后他们幸福地生活着。‎ ‎◎ever since“从……以来”‎ I’ve known him ever since he was a boy. 我从小就认识他。‎ ‎◎ever so“非常”‎ Li Xiang is ever so strong. 李翔非常强壮。‎ ‎◎for ever“永远”‎ We love our motherland for ever. 我们永远爱我们的祖国。‎ ‎(2)forgotten to bring是“忘记带来”的意思，构成forget to do sth 句型，表示“忘记将要做某事”（事情还没有做）。‎ Don’t forget to turn off the lights when you leave the room.‎ 离开房间时不要忘记关灯。‎ 特别提示 forget doing sth 表示“忘记做过某事”（事情做过,但忘了）。‎ I forgot returning the book to the ‎ library.我忘记曾把这本书还给图书馆了。‎ ‎7. In 1938, a radio program by actor Orson Welles announced that aliens from Mars had landed on the earth. (P80)1938年，由Orson Welles主持的电台节目宣布来自火星的外星人在地球上登陆了。‎ ‎(1)announce 意思是“宣布”，常指首次公开或正式宣布人们关心的某件事情。‎ The new government announced its policy at once.新政府立即宣布了它的政策。‎ The headmaster announced the result of the exam. 校长宣布考试成绩。‎ 知识拓展 announcer，名词，“宣布者”，“播音员”；announcement名词，“宣告”，“通告”，“预告”。‎ ‎(2)aliens是“外侨”的意思，在这里指的是“来自另一世界的生物”，与from Mars搭配，表示“来自火星的外星人”。‎ ‎(3)on the earth意为“在地球上”，而in the earth却是“在地里”，“在地下”的意思。‎ We live on the earth. 我们生活在地球上。‎ In the winter some animals hide in the earth. 冬天有些动物藏在地下。‎ 特别提示 on earth表示“究竟”，“到底”，常用在who, what, where, when, why等特殊疑问词后，以加强疑问的语气;也可以用在否定词之后，以加强否定的语气。‎ How on earth did you know it? 你到底是怎么知道的？‎ Nothing on earth could make him change his mind.无论什么都不能使他改变注意。‎ ‎◎on earth还可意为“在世界上”，“世间”，有时用于最高级之后，以加强其含义。‎ You are the happiest man on earth. 你是世界上最幸福的人。‎ ‎8. Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country. (P80)Welles的话是如此具有说服力，以至于成百上千人相信了他的话，全国处于一片恐慌之中。‎ ‎(1)so...that在这里引导结果状语从句，表示“如此……以至于……”，that后面接从句，常见的句型有：‎ ‎◎主语+系动词（be, become等）+so+形容词+that从句。‎ The computer is so useful that each of us wants to buy one.‎ 计算机太有用了，我们每个人都想买一台。‎ ‎◎主语+行为动词+so+副词+that从句。‎ He ran so fast that we couldn’t catch up with him. 他跑得太快，我们追不上他。‎ ‎◎so...that后面也可以跟so many/few加复数可数名词或so much/little加不可数名词。‎ He had so many falls that he could ride a bike at last. ‎ 他摔了很多跤，终于学会了骑车。‎ There’s so much noise in the meeting room that I can’t hear the speaker clearly.‎ 会议室里的噪音太大，我听不清演讲者的发言。‎ 知识拓展 so...that句型转换的四种方法 ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...to...转换。‎ The little girl was so tired that she couldn’t walk farther.‎ ‎=The little girl was too tired to walk farther.‎ 这个小女孩太累了，她不能再走路了。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是否定式时，常用too...for sb to do sth转换。‎ The work is so difficult that we can’t finish it in time.‎ ‎=The work is too difficult for us to finish it in time.‎ 这份工作太难了，我们不能按时完成。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough to do sth转换。‎ He is so strong that he can lift the heavy box.‎ ‎=He is strong enough to lift the heavy box.他强壮得足以举起那个重箱子。‎ ‎◎当从句的主语与主句中的主语不一致，且that从句是肯定式时，常用...enough for sb to do sth转换。‎ He spoke so clearly that I could hear him.‎ ‎=He spoke clearly enough for me to hear him.他说得很清楚，我能听明白。‎ 特别提示 so that连在一起使用，意为“为了，以便”，表示目的，此时主句和从句的主语不一定一致；另外，还可以引导结果状语从句，前面一般用逗号。‎ Speak louder so that we can hear you. 说大声点儿，以便我们听得见。‎ She was ill, so that she was unable to go with you. 她病了，不能和你一起去了。‎ ‎(2)convincing 是由动词convince加后缀-ing构成的形容词，意为“令人信服的、有说服力的”，主语通常由表示物体的词来担任。‎ His speech was very convincing. 他的演讲非常有说服力。‎ ‎◎convince是及物动词，表示“使……信服”，“使……确信”。‎ You have convinced me that I should go.你已经说服了我，我应该去。‎ 短语链语 convince sb of sth“使某人相信某事”‎ 特别提示 convinced作形容词时，表示“坚定不移的、有坚定信仰的”，在句中用作定语，其主语是人。‎ Mr Smith is a convinced Christian. 史密斯先生是一个虔诚的基督徒。‎ ‎（3）短语动词set off在本句中是“引起、激起”的意思。‎ A letter from home set off an attack of homesickness. ‎ 一封家信激起了一片思乡之情。‎ 特别提示 set off在作“出发、动身”解时,与set out意思相同。‎ It was raining when we set off/out. 我们出发时,天还下着雨。‎ ‎9. One April Fool’s day, a reporter in England announced that there would be no more spaghetti because the spaghetti farmers in Italy had ‎ stopped growing spaghetti. (P80)一个愚人节，有位英国记者宣称以后不会再有意大利式细面条可以吃了，因为意大利的农民已经停止种植生产细面条的植物了。‎ ‎(1)there would be是there be的过去将来时，也可表示为“there was going to be”或“there were going to be”，意为“过去将有”。‎ 知识拓展 过去将来时由“助动词would/should+动词原形”构成，表示从过去某个时间看将来要发生的动作或存在的状态，常运用于宾语从句中。‎ The students didn’t know where they would go tomorrow.‎ 同学们不知道明天要去哪儿。‎ Nobody knew where he would go. 没人知道他要去哪里。‎ ‎◎过去将来时也常可用“助动词was/were+going to+动词原形”表示。‎ She said that she was going to speak at the meeting.她说她要在大会上发言。‎ Li Ping said that she was going to visit her aunt in the town the next Sunday.‎ 李萍说她下个星期日要去拜访住在城里的婶婶。‎ 特别提示 表示位置移动的动词如come, leave, fly, go, arrive等，常用过去进行时表示一个当时按计划或安排近期将要发生的动作。‎ He didn’t say when he was coming here. 他没有说什么时候要来这里。‎ She told me that she was leaving for Shanghai next week.‎ 她告诉我说她下周要动身去上海。‎ ‎ （2）本句中的farmer意为“农夫、农场主、经营农业者”，主要指经营农场的人，主要用于英国、澳大利亚、加拿大、新西兰、美国等，因为这些国家的农业以农场经营为主。‎ Are you a farmer? 你是个农民吗？‎ 特别提示 peasant意为“农民”，常指非英语国家的雇农、佃农或自耕农。在我们国家，目前将“农民”都译为peasant。‎ What’s the old peasant saying to them? 那位老农在对他们说什么？‎ ‎10. By the time people realized that the story was a hoax, all of the spaghetti across the country had been bought. (P80)当人们意识到这是一个骗局的时候，全国的意大利面条都已被买完了。‎ have been bought是现在完成时的被动语态，其构成为：has／have been+过去分词。‎ Man-made satellites have been sent up into space by many countries.‎ 人造卫星已被许多国家发射到太空。‎ 特别提示 现在完成时被动语态结构中有两个过去分词，其中has／have为助动词，因此其各种句型转换均应借助于has／have来完成。构成否定句时直接在 has／have后面加not，构成一般疑问句时将has／have提前。‎ Has this bridge been finished? 这座桥竣工了吗？ ‎ His homework hasn’t been finished. 他的家庭作业还没有写完。 ‎ ‎11. A famous TV star once invited his girlfriend onto his show on April ‎ Fool’s Day. (P80)从前，有位著名的电视明星在愚人节那天邀请他的女友参加他的演出。‎ 本句中的show用作名词，表示“演出”，“展览”。‎ The show begins at eight o’clock. 演出8点钟开始。‎ There is going to be an art show next week. 下周有一个美术展览。‎ 知识拓展 show作动词时，表示“给……看”，“出示……”。‎ He showed his ticket at the door.他在门口出示了门票。‎ 短语链语 on show表示“展览、陈列”，相当于on display。‎ ‎12. She was thrilled, because she really wanted to get married. (P80)她很激动，因为她真的想结婚。‎ ‎(1)thrilled是形容词，意为“非常激动的、非常兴奋的”，常用来说明一个人的心情。‎ He was thrilled when he heard the news. 他听到这个消息时很激动。‎ She was thrilled and shy when she heard “I love you” from her boy friend. ‎ 当她听到她男朋友说“我爱你”的时候，她很激动也很害羞。‎ ‎(2)get married是固定短语，意为“结婚”，表示动作；而be married表示状态，意为“结婚了”，这两个短语都可以和介词to连用。‎ She’s married to my brother. 她嫁给了我哥哥。‎ They’re saving up to get married. 他们储蓄准备结婚。‎ 魔力纠错 他和我的一个朋友结了婚。‎ 误：He was married with a friend of mine. ‎ 正：He was married to a friend of mine.‎ 魔力解析 当表示“与……结婚”时，marry用作及物动词，其后接介词to，而不能用with。‎ 特别提示 marry是短暂性动词，当表示“结婚多长时间”时，要用be married。‎ Lucy married Robert two years ago. ‎ ‎= Lucy has been married to Robert for two years. ‎ ‎=It is two years since Lucy married Robert.‎ ‎=Two years have passed since Lucy married Robert. 露茜和罗伯特结婚两年了。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎问某人“婚否”时应说Are you married?或Is he married？等；如果“未婚”，可以说I’m single.。‎ ‎◎问某人“何时结的婚”应说When were you married?或When did you get married?。‎ Unit 11 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?（P86） 请问洗手间在哪里？‎ 本句是问路或问处所的常用语，通常应先说excuse me，以引起对方注意，也表示尊重对方。‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me where Xianfeng Middle School is?‎ 打扰了。请问先锋中学在哪儿？‎ 知识拓展 问路的表示法 英语中表达问路或处所的句式有不少，下面介绍几种常用的问路的方法。‎ 试译：打扰了。请问去书店怎么走？‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me how I can get to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me how to get to the bookshop?‎ Excuse me. Could you tell me where the bookshop is?‎ Excuse me. Which is the way to the bookshop, please?‎ Excuse me. Where’s the bookshop, please?‎ Excuse me. How can I get to the bookshop, please?‎ ‎2. ...because my friends hang out there. (P88)……因为我的朋友都在那儿闲逛。‎ hang out常用于美语口语中，意为“闲逛”。还可以表示“常去某处”的意思。‎ Where do you hang out these days?这些日子你们都在什么地方闲逛来着？‎ 知识拓展 动词hang是“悬挂”，“吊”，“吊死”等意思。可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词。‎ He remained hanging in mid-air, saved by the belt.‎ 他吊在半空中，安全带救了他。‎ A full moon hung in the sky on Mid-autumn Day.‎ 中秋那天，一轮圆月挂在天空。‎ The last Ming emperor hanged himself from this tree.‎ 明朝最后一个皇帝就是在这棵树上吊死的。‎ 特别提示 同学们可能已经注意到，以上句子中的动词过去式用的不同。hang表示“悬挂”，“吊”的意思时，是不规则动词，过去式和过去分词形式是hung，而意为“吊死”时，是规则动词。魔力纠错 ‎① 同学们把一幅世界地图挂在左边墙上。‎ 误：The students hanged a map of the world on the wall to the left.‎ 正：The students hung a map of the world on the wall to the left.‎ ‎② 总有一天恐怖分子将被人民处以绞刑。‎ 误：The terrorists will be hung by the people some day.‎ 正：The terrorists will be hanged by the people some day.‎ ‎3. There’s always something happening.(P88)总是有事情发生。‎ 本句是there be句型的一个固定结构，即there be+sb/sth+doing sth，意为“有……在做……”。‎ My friend said there was a truck collecting rubbish outside.‎ 我的朋友说外面有一辆卡车正在收集垃圾。‎ There is a Mr Wang waiting to see you outside your office.‎ 有一个姓王的人在门外等着要见你。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎ there be+sb/sth+to do sth，表示“主语将做某事”。‎ There will be some Australian students to come to our class.‎ 有几个澳大利亚的学生要到我们班里来。‎ ‎◎ there be也可不表示“存在”意义，常以否定句的形式出现时，用于对某一具体行为和抽象概念的否定，其句型是there is+no+doing sth。‎ There is no saying what may happen. 很难说会发生什么事。‎ There is no telling when he will return. 说不清他何时回来。‎ There is no knowing when we shall meet again. 不知何时我们能再相会。‎ ‎4. I also like to look at books in the bookstore. (P88)我也喜欢在书店里看书。‎ 汉语的“看书”既可表示“阅读”的意思，也可表示“翻看一下”，“随便看看”。英语的表达在词语上就有所不同了。请“看”区别。‎ He looks at that book, takes it down and reads it carefully. ‎ 他看了看那本书，然后拿下来，认真地读了起来。‎ looks at that book与read it(the book)在内容上是完全不同的。look at that book仅指“看书”，用来表示“看了看”，不是以阅读为目的；而read it(the book)则是“读了读”书中的内容。‎ ‎5. Go past the park, and turn left onto Oak Street. (P88)走过公园，然后向左拐到橡树街。‎ go past the park...是一种指路方式，go past表示“走过”‎ 的意思，past是介词，意为“途经”，“经过”。‎ When she went past the parking, Mary saw a man standing at a new car. ‎ 当玛丽走过停车场时，看见一个人站在一辆新车旁。‎ ‎【友情链接】常见的指路表达式有：‎ Walk along/down this road, and take the first crossing on the right.‎ 沿着这条路向前走，在第一个十字路口向右拐。‎ Go along this street, and turn right.顺着这条路向前走，然后向右拐。‎ Walk on and turn left, and you will see the tall building on the right.‎ 继续向前走，然后左拐，在右边你就会看见那栋高楼了。‎ Go along/down this street to the traffic lights, and turn left.‎ 沿着这条路向前走，一直到交通灯处，然后向左拐。‎ ‎6. ...and eat at Uncle Bob’s. (P90)……在鲍伯叔叔的小店吃饭。‎ 当名词表示店铺、办公室或某人的家时，名词所有格所修饰的名词常常省去。‎ Uncle Bob’s是名词“‘s”所有格的一种特殊用法。在表示店铺，餐馆，某种职业，某人的家等名词的所有格后面的名词，常可以省略。如at the doctor’s=at the doctor’s clinic“在大夫的诊所”； at Mr Green’s=at Mr Green’s home“在格林先生家里”。‎ 特别提示 在表示店铺、场所及姓氏的名词前，要用定冠词the，在表示称呼语的名词前，要加物主代词。‎ ‎7. They have organized games and the staff dressed up as clowns. (P90)他们组织游戏活动，工作人员打扮成小丑的模样。‎ ‎◎dress作为及物动词，指穿衣服的动作，后面不用表示衣服的名词作宾语，但可用指人的名词或代词作宾语，表示给某人穿衣服。‎ She dressed her children quickly.她很快给孩子们穿上衣服。‎ ‎◎dress的过去分词dressed与get连用表示“穿上衣服”。‎ Let’s get dressed and leave at once.咱们穿好衣服马上出发。‎ ‎◎dress up是“化装”，“穿上盛装”，“打扮”的意思。‎ They all dressed up as PLA men.他们都打扮成解放军的模样。‎ She likes to dress up for a party.她喜欢把自己打扮得漂漂亮亮去参加晚会。‎ ‎8. make a telephone call(P86)打个电话 Mr Tan makes the best noodles in town. (P91)谭先生是镇上面条做得最好的。‎ make是英语中非常活跃的一个单词。‎ ‎◎ 用于打电话。第一句中的make后接表示电话的词语，是“打电话”的意思。make a telephone call相当于动词call, ring, phone, telephone等。‎ 试译：我给格林先生打个电话。‎ ‎① I call/ring/phone/telephone Mr Green.‎ ‎② I call/ring/phone Mr Green up.‎ ‎③ I give Mr Green a ring/call.‎ ‎④ I make a telephone call to Mr Green.‎ ‎◎ 表示“做”，“制作”。第二句中的make表示“（用材料或零件）做，制作，制造，建造或创造某物”，其所制造的产品通常是由一个或几个部分组成的。‎ Mother made a big cake for Michael on his birthday.‎ 妈妈为迈克尔生日做了一个大蛋糕。‎ The workers are making cars in the factory. 工人们在工厂里生产汽车。‎ He is good at making toy cars. 他擅长做儿童玩具。‎ ‎【友情链接】make还有一个重要用法，表示“使”的意思，在历年的中考中都有它的考点。这一用法主要掌握两点：（1）在主动语态中，后接不定式作宾语补足语时要省去to；（2）在被动语态中后接不定式作主语补足语时，一定要加上to。‎ The boss made his employees work two more hours.‎ 老板使他的雇员又工作了两个小时。‎ Maria was made to leave the company.玛丽亚被迫离开了公司。‎ ‎9. ...“Excuse me, I wonder if you can help me.”(P92)……“打扰了，我不知道您是否能帮帮我”。‎ 动词wonder在不同的句子结构中表达的意思不同：‎ ‎(1)后接“who, what, why等疑问词引导的宾语从句”，“疑问词+不定式”时，表示“想知道”。‎ The teacher wondered why she was late.老师想知道她为什么迟到。‎ He wondered what happened.他想知道发生了什么事情。‎ I’m just wondering how to do it.我正想知道怎么做那件事。‎ ‎(2）后接“that引导的宾语从句”，“不定式短语”时，表示“感到惊奇，对……感到惊讶”。‎ I wonder that he was off office.我对他下岗感到惊讶。‎ I wonder to see her looking so cheerful. 我很惊讶地发现她如此高兴。‎ ‎(3)后接if或whether引导的宾语从句时，表示一种委婉的请求或疑问。‎ I wonder if you would mind giving me a hand.‎ 我不知道你是否能帮我一下。‎ She wondered whether you were free that morning.‎ 她不知道那天上午你是否有空。‎ Unit 12 You’re supposed to shake hands.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. You’re supposed to shake hands.(P94)你们应该握手。‎ be supposed to用来表示根据规定或按照法律人们不得不做的事，或期待将要发生的事，与should相似，后面也是接动词原形。否定形式在be动词后加not，常表示禁止做某事。‎ We’re supposed to make no noise in class. 在课堂上我们不该发出噪音。‎ We’re supposed to start work at 8∶00 every morning.‎ 我们应该每天早晨八点开始工作。‎ ‎2. Spending time with family and friends is very important to us. (P96)与家人和朋友共度时光对我们非常重要。‎ Spending time with family and friends 是动名词短语，在本句中作主语。动名词（短语）作主语时，谓语动词要用第三人称单数形式。如果是并列的动名词（短语）作主句时，谓语动词用复数形式。‎ Reading in bed is not good for your eyes. 在床上看书对眼睛不好。‎ Reading and writing take me a lot of time. 读书写作花了我不少时间。‎ 不定式（短语）也可作主语，两者的区别在“语法天地”中有详解。‎ ‎3. We’re the land of watches, after all! (P96)毕竟我们是手表的国度。‎ 句中的land意为“国土”，“国家”。它还可以表示 “陆地”，与河流和海洋相对；也可以表示“土地”，可耕种的田地就叫做land。‎ We traveled by land until we reached the sea.我们沿陆路旅行，直到看见大海。‎ All the waste land in this area has been opened up.这个地区的荒地全被开垦了。‎ 知识拓展 与“土地”，“地”相关的词语还有earth, soil和ground。‎ ‎◎ earth意为“地”，“地球”，“泥土”。它着重指“大地”，区别于“天空”。‎ The earth moves round the sun.地球围绕太阳转。‎ ‎◎ soil意为“土地”，“土壤”，尤指生长植物的土地。‎ The soil is very thin in the forest.森林里土层非常薄。‎ ‎◎ ground意为“地”，“地面”，主要指大地表面。不论是泥地，沙地或水泥地，均可用这个词表示；也可以用来指运动场地。‎ The ground is covered with leaves in the woods.树林里的地面上落满了树叶。‎ ‎4. You’re not supposed to make noise while eating noodles. (P97)吃面条的时候你不应该弄出响声来。‎ 句中的while eating noodles是while接从句的省略形式，该句完整形式是while you are eating noodles。由while和when引导的时间状语从句，如果主语和主句的主语相同，从句中的主语和be动词常可省略。‎ While/When (she was)leaving the house, she was heard to make some ‎ commonplace remark to her husband.有人听到她在离开房间时同他的丈夫寒暄。‎ ‎5. It’s rude to point at anyone with your chopsticks. (P97)用筷子指着别人是无礼的。‎ 本句是主系表结构，不定式短语是真正的主语，it是形式主语。句中point意为“指”，“指向”，常构成短语point at, point to和point out。‎ ‎◎point to和point at都含有“指着”的意思，两者一般可以互换。‎ The teacher is pointing at/to the map on the wall.老师指着墙上的地图。‎ ‎◎但主语是事物时，一般用point to作谓语。point at可以分开使用，即point后直接跟名词或代词作宾语，再跟介词at表示方向，意为“把……指向”，而point to却不能分开使用。‎ The soldier pointed his gun at the doctor.士兵用枪指着医生。‎ ‎◎point out意为“指出”，其中out是副词。如果它后面的宾语是代词，则必须把该宾语放在out之前。‎ Please point out the mistakes in my composition.请指出我作文中的错误。‎ Luckily， the man knew Mr Green and pointed him out to us.‎ 幸好这个人认识格林先生，于是便把他指给我们看。‎ ‎6. Although I still make lots of mistakes, it doesn’t bother me like it used to. (P98)虽然我还是出了不少错，但它（法语）不像以前那样让我烦恼。‎ ‎（1）mistake意为“错误”，“过失”‎ ‎，可数名词，常指由于认识，理解或判断上的失误造成行为或看法上的错误，也指因粗心，疏忽，技术不熟练等而犯的错误。通常与make连用构成make mistakes/a mistake“出错”，“犯错误”。‎ Anyone can make a mistake. 人人都会犯错误。‎ He only made two mistakes in grammar today. 他今天只犯了两个语法错误。‎ ‎（2）bother 意思是“烦扰，打扰”，常用作及物动词。‎ Hot weather bothers me. 炎热的天气使我烦恼。‎ ‎7. I find it difficult to remember everything, but I’m gradually getting used to things, and don’t find them so strange any more. (P98)我发现将这一切全记住很难，但慢慢就对这些东西习惯了，也就不再觉得它们很怪异了。‎ ‎（1）find it difficult to remember everything中的it是形式宾语，动词不定式短语是真正的宾语，形容词difficult是宾补。‎ I found it hard to do the work all by myself.我发现独自一人干这活很难。‎ I think it useful to read English in the morning. 我认为早晨读英语很有用。‎ ‎（2）be used to sth/doing(sth)是中学英语学习中的重点、难点，也是中考考点。常与used to do sth和be used to do sth一起进行考查。‎ ‎◎be used to是“习惯于”的意思，可用于各种时态。其中to是介词，后面接名词、代词或动词-ing形式。‎ She isn’t used to living in the country.她不习惯住在乡下。‎ We’ve been used to hard work.我们已经习惯干累活了。‎ ‎◎强调界限性的状态，说明从不习惯到习惯时，常在used前面用get或become代替be。这种现象尤其常见于将来时态和完成时态中。‎ You will soon get used to the weather here.你很快就会习惯这里的天气的。‎ ‎◎有时be used to do是动词use的被动语态形式，意为“被用来……”。在这种结构里，to是动词不定式符号。‎ Man-made satellites are used to send and receive TV programs.‎ 人造卫星用来发射和接收电视节目。‎ Steel may be used to make machines.钢可以用来制造机器。‎ ‎8. Questions crowded my mind. (P99)我的脑海涌现出一些疑问。‎ crowd表示“大量涌入”，在此句中的crowd是比喻用法， 含义是“涌入”。‎ Disturbing thoughts crowded into my mind. 我心乱如麻。‎ Tourists crowded the beach. 游客挤满了海滩。‎ ‎9. ...your teachers will not be pleased if you write e-mail English in a test!(P101)……如果你在测试中用电子邮件英语老师会不高兴的。‎ please“使高兴”，相关词语有pleased, pleasure与pleasant。‎ Does the cloth please you?这布料合你的意吗？‎ The Emperor was pleased by what the Minister told him about the cloth.‎ 听了大臣关于布料的禀报，皇帝非常高兴。‎ ‎【友情链接】这四个词都有“满意”，“高兴”的意思，但词性和用法不相同。‎ ‎◎ please是动词，可用作及物动词或不及物动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。‎ ‎◎ pleased是过去分词，意为“感到高兴（满意）”，其作用相当于形容词，常与be连用，后接介词at, with,‎ ‎ by等引起的短语，还可接动词不定式或that从句。‎ ‎◎ pleasure是名词，表示“高兴”，“快乐”，“娱乐”时，为不可数名词；表示“乐趣，高兴的事”时，为可数名词。如：It is one of my greatest pleasures.它是我最大的乐趣之一。‎ ‎◎pleasant是形容词，意为“使人感到愉快（满意）”，一般用作定语。如主语指物，也可用作表语。‎ ‎ 10. seat与 sit“坐”不同 ‎◎ seat通常用作及物动词，与反身代词连用，或用be seated这一形式（这种用法不如sit普通），seat还可作“能坐……人”解，主语往往是地方。‎ Be seated, everybody!大家请坐吧。‎ That cinema can seat 2,000 people.那家电影院能坐两千人。‎ ‎◎ sit通常作不及物动词，不需要宾语。‎ In the bus we sat together.在公共汽车里我们坐在一起。人教版新目标英语9年级unit7-9‎ Unit 7 Where would you like to visit?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. Where would you like to go on vacation, Sam? (P52)山姆，你想去哪儿度假呀？‎ ‎(1)go on是不及物动词词组，意为“继续”，其后不能跟名词或代词作宾语。‎ The teacher asked him to stop talking, but he still went on.‎ 老师叫他别讲，可他还是讲个不停 ‎◎go on后面可以接动词不定式或动词-ing形式，但它们的意义不同。‎ Let’s go on discussing the question. 咱们继续谈论这个问题吧。‎ Let’s go on to discuss the question. 咱们接着谈论另外一个问题吧。‎ 短语链语 go on with表示“继续”，后面可直接跟名词或代词作宾语。‎ Then Miss Gao went back to her desk and went on with the lesson.‎ 然后高老师回到讲桌后边，继续上课。‎ ‎◎go on with可与go on doing sth 互换。‎ Go on with your work(=Go on doing your work).继续做你的工作去吧。‎ 特别提示 holiday还可以用来表示“节日”，“纪念日”。‎ Everyone was in his holiday clothes. 人人都穿上了节日的盛装。‎ ‎2. v-ing型形容词和v-ed型形容词 本单元出现了大量v-ing型形容词，那么大家对它的用法熟悉吗？在英语中，某些动词的后面加上-ing或-ed，可以变成形容词。‎ v-ing型形容词具有主动或进行的含义，是人或物本身所具有的品质。常见的词有：‎ surprise—surprising 令人惊奇的 excite—exciting令人兴奋的 bore—boring 令人讨厌的 interest—interesting 有趣的 develop—developing 发展中的 move—moving 感人的 inspire—inspiring 鼓舞人心的 v-ed型形容词具有被动或已完成的含义，是由于受到某种影响而产生的结果。常见的词有：‎ surprise—surprised感到惊奇的 bore—bored 感到厌恶的 excite—excited 感到兴奋的 interest—interested感兴趣的 develop—developed 发达的 move—moved 受感动的 inspire—inspired受到鼓舞的 please—pleased 高兴的 ‎3. For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris? (P54)下一次假期为什么不考虑去巴黎呢？‎ ‎(1)Why not+动词原形相当于Why don’t you+动词原形，表示“为什么不……”，常用来向别人提建议。‎ Why not study hard? 为什么不努力学习？‎ Why don’t you ask the policeman for help? 怎么不向那个警察寻求帮助呢？‎ ‎(2)consider 表示“考虑，细想”，相当于think about，后面接动词时，应用动词的-ing形式。‎ I first considered writing to him, but then decided to see him. ‎ 我开始想写信给他，但后来决定去见他。‎ ‎4. Paris is the capital of France, and is one of the liveliest cities in Europe. (P54)巴黎是法国的首都，是欧洲最活跃的城市之一。‎ lively是形容词，意为“活泼的，活跃的，有生气的”，在句中作定语或表语，用来修饰人或物。‎ She is a lively girl. 她是个活泼的女孩。‎ The sports ground is lively with all sorts of ball games.‎ 运动场上要进行各种球类比赛，呈现出一派生气勃勃的景象。‎ 特别提示 ‎◎alive作形容词，意为“活着的，在世的”，常作表语，但有时也作后置定语或补语。‎ He must be alive, for he is still breathing slightly. ‎ 他一定还活着，因为他还在轻微呼吸。‎ He is the only person alive in the accident. 他是这次事故中惟一活下来的人。‎ An enemy officer was caught alive. 一名敌人军官被活捉了。‎ ‎◎living是形容词，意为“活着的”，常位于名词之前或之后作定语；作表语时与alive意思相同。‎ We now know there are no living things on the moon. ‎ 我们现在知道月球上没有生物。‎ Is his grandfather still living/alive? 他的祖父还活着吗？‎ ‎◎live读作/laiv/时，也作形容词，意为“活着的”，常放在名词之前作定语，它一般不用来修饰人；live读/liv/时，是动词，意为“生活，生存”。‎ The cat was playing with a live mouse. 这只猫在玩弄一只活老鼠。‎ Pandas usually live in the south and the southeast of China.‎ 熊猫通常生活在中国的南部和东南部。‎ ‎5. It doesn’t have any beaches or mountains, but there are still many things to do there. (P54)它没有沙滩和山脉，但是在那儿仍然有很多的事情可做。‎ 在本句中连词or连接两个被否定的并列成分。‎ The world’s favorite food isn’t English, Italian, Indian or Japanese, but it’s American fast food. 世界上最受欢迎的食品不是英国食品、意大利食品、印度食品和日本食品，而是美国快餐。‎ 魔力纠错 他没有弟弟, 也没有妹妹。‎ 误：He has no brothers and sisters.‎ 正：He has no brothers or sisters.‎ 魔力解析 在否定句，or是“也不”的意思，而and表示的却是肯定的意义。因此，上句还可以写为He has no brothers and no sisters。‎ 知识拓展 连词or在“祈使句+or+简单句”句型中, 表示“否则，不然”，引出一个相反的结果，本句型可以转换为含否定的if从句。‎ Get up early, or you’ll be late for school.‎ ‎→If you don’t get up early, you’ll be late for school.早点起，否则你就会迟到。‎ 短语链语 ‎◎either...or表示“不是……，就是……”；“或者……，或者……”。‎ Either you or I am right. 不是你对就是我对。‎ ‎◎sooner or later意为“迟早”。‎ Don’t worry. Sooner or later, we can speak English well.‎ 别担心，迟早我们能说好英语。‎ ‎6. ...including the Eiffel Tower and Notre Dame Cathedral, one of the most famous churches in the world. (P54)……包括埃菲尔铁塔和巴黎圣母院，世界上最著名的教堂之一。‎ ‎(1)本句中的include意为“包括”，“连……在内”，指包括或容纳某东西成为整体的一部分，侧重于对比整体与部分。‎ The money I gave you includes Xiao Wang’s. 我给你的钱里包括了小王的。‎ The coins included examples of almost all the types of Chinese coin. ‎ 这些硬币包括了几乎所有的中国硬币的品种。‎ 特别提示 contain意为“含有，包含，里面装有”，指某物容纳比其更小的东西，侧重所含的量与成分。‎ The basket contains a variety of fruits. 这个篮子里装有各种水果。‎ These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt and so on. ‎ 这些食物应该含有一些脂肪、纤维，还应该有一点盐等等。‎ ‎(2)本句中的famous 是形容词，常用于be famous as或be famous for结构中，意为“因……而闻名”。‎ ‎◎当主语是表示人的名词时，be famous as表示“以某种身份而出名”，be famous for表示“以某种知识、技能或作品而出名”。‎ Einstein was famous as a great scientist. 爱因斯坦以一位伟大的科学家而著名。‎ Einstein was famous for his Theory of Relativity.‎ ‎ 爱因斯坦以他的相对论而著名。‎ ‎7. Isn’t it supposed to be very hot? (P54)难道天气不应该是很热的吗？‎ ‎(1)这是一个否定形式的一般疑问句，用来表示说话人提出自己的建议或看法，并希望得到对方肯定的答复。有时它也表示惊讶、不相信、挖苦、批评等意义，其构成是：Isn’t(Aren’t, Don’t, Won’t, Can’t, Couldn’t, Didn’t, Haven’t, Hasn’t等)+主语？‎ Isn’t he a League member? 难道他不是团员吗？‎ Haven’t you known him yet? I saw you having dinner with him just now.‎ 你难道还不认识他吗？刚才我还见你和他一起吃饭了呢。‎ ‎(2)be supposed to 的意思与should近似，意为“被期望或被要求做某事”。‎ Am I supposed to clean all the rooms or the single one? ‎ 我是应该打扫所有房间还是这个单间？‎ You’re supposed to start work at 8∶30 every morning. ‎ 你应该每天早晨八点半开始工作。‎ ‎8. My family and I want to take a trip this summer somewhere in the east of China. (P56)今年夏天，我和家人想到中国东部的某个地方去旅行。‎ ‎(1)名词trip指短距离的旅行，常含有回到原出发地之意。有时在口语中也指远程旅行，这时可与journey替换。‎ Have a good trip. 一路顺风。‎ During the four-hour trip, he wandered from car to car.‎ 在四小时的旅途中，他在各个车厢之间逛来逛去。‎ ‎9. I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of ‎ vacations that your firm can offer. (P56)我希望你能给我提供一些贵公司能提供的各种假期旅游的信息。‎ ‎(1)provide 作动词，表示“供应，供给;预先约定”，可作及物动词，也可作不及物动词。 ‎ The farm provided them all the food they needed.‎ 农场提供他们所需要的全部食物。‎ ‎(2)firm表示“公司，商号，商行”等意思，常指商行，不用于商号名称。‎ He is thinking of starting another firm in Paris. ‎ 他正在考虑在巴黎另开一家公司。‎ 特别提示 offer可作名词，意为“提供，提议，提出”，后面接名词或动词不定式作宾语。‎ He offered me a glass of wine. 他给了我一杯酒。‎ The driver offered to drive us to the station. ‎ 那位司机主动提出送我们去火车站。‎ ‎10. It would be nice if our hotel had rooms with kitchens so we could save money by cooking our own meals. (P56)如果我们住的宾馆房间带有厨房那就太好了，那样的话我们可以自己做饭，也就节省钱了。‎ ‎(1)with kitchens是介词短语，在句中作定语修饰rooms。with在这里意为“具有，带有”，由其连接的介词短语在句中作定语修饰名词，常用以说明人或物的特征；作状语时，表示一个伴随状态。‎ Mrs Smith is a woman with big eyes and long hair.‎ 史密斯太太是一位大眼睛、长头发的妇女。‎ ‎（2）动词save 在本句中是“节省”的意思。‎ If you want to save time, you’d better make a list before you go shopping.‎ 如果你想节省时间，去买东西之前，先列一张购物清单。‎ 知识拓展 save还有“拯救”，“抢救”，“搭救”；“储存”，“保存”等多种意思。‎ A lot of land has been saved by the Great Green Wall.‎ 绿色长城拯救了许多土地。‎ My father saved a lot of money in the bank. ‎ 我父亲在银行里存了许多钱。‎ ‎11. We all dream about things that we would like to do, and things we hope to achieve in the future. (P58) 我们都梦想着自己想要做的事情，以及我们希望将来要实现的事情。‎ 本句中的in the future意为“将来，未来”，即in the time yet to come。‎ Who can tell what will happen in the future? ‎ 谁能知道将来会发生什么？‎ In the future, shopping can be done by videophone. ‎ 在将来，购买东西能在可视电话中进行。‎ 特别提示 in future意为“今后”，相当于from now on。‎ In future, be more careful with your spelling. ‎ 今后你要更加注意你的拼写。‎ I advise you not to eat fruit that isn’t ripe in future.‎ 我劝你今后不要吃不熟的水果。‎ ‎12. According to the survey, less realistic dreams are also common... (P58)根据调查得知，不现实的梦想也很普遍……。‎ 本句中的common意为“普通的”，“常见的”，“不足为奇的”，有时常发生，对每个人、每个地方都普遍的意思。‎ Snow is common in cold countries. 在寒冷的国家，下雪是常见的事情。‎ 特别提示 usual意为“平常的”，“通常的”，指在某一地方、某一时间或某一人身上所常见的，往往指常用的东西或常发生的事情。‎ We followed the usual method of test.我们采用了通常的测试方法。‎ Unit 8 I’llhelp clean up the city parks.‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. I’d like to help homeless people. (P60)我想帮助无家可归的人。‎ homeless是形容词，意为“无家可归的”，由home+后缀-less构成。‎ 特别提示 less后缀通常加在名词的后面，构成形容词，表示与原来名词意思相反的形容词，如groundless 无根据的， odorless 无气味的, careless粗心的，useless无用的。‎ ‎2. You could help clean up the city parks. (P60)你可以帮着打扫城市公园。‎ ‎◎clean up是“清除、除去（垃圾、污物）”等，使地方干净。‎ Please clean up the room after the party. 聚会后把房间打扫干净。‎ We should clean up the dirty parts of the sea.‎ 我们应该清除海里的污染部分。‎ ‎◎clean up还可以表示“挣得，赢得（多少钱）”。‎ He cleaned up a small fortune. 他发了一笔小财。‎ 特别提示 clean oneself up意为“洗干净”。‎ Your hands are dirty, you’d better clean yourself up.‎ 你的手脏了，你应该洗洗它们。 ‎ ‎3. You could give out food at a food bank. (P60)你可以在食品供应站分发食品。‎ give out在这里是“分发”，“散发”的意思。‎ Our English teacher gave out the examination papers when the bell rang. ‎ 我们的英语老师在铃响的时候分发试卷。‎ ‎◎另外一个意思为“用完”，“消耗尽”。‎ After a week their food supplies gave out. 一周之后，他们的食物供应用完了。‎ ‎◎还有一个意思为“发出”，“送出”。‎ The sun gives out a lot of heat. 太阳能发出热量。‎ ‎4. He looks sad. Let’s cheer him up.(P61)他看上去很伤心。我们去帮他振作起来吧。‎ cheer up sb或cheer sb up意为“（使某人）高兴起来，振作起来”。如果是代词做宾语，则将代词放在中间。‎ Cheer up! The news isn’t too bad. 不要发愁啦，这消息不错嘛！‎ He took her to the ballet to cheer her up. ‎ 他为了使她高兴起来，便带她去看芭蕾舞。‎ ‎5. This volunteer work takes each of them several hours a week, so it is a major commitment. (P62)这份义工每周花了他们每个人好几个小时的时间，所以这是一个重大的贡献。‎ ‎(1)each of them是指“他们中的每一个”。如果做主语，则谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。‎ 知识拓展 each与every的用法 ‎◎each指一个整体中的每一个，强调个体；every着重于全体的总和，强调整体。试比较：‎ Each has a different book. （强调各有不同。）‎ Here every child at the age of six can go to school. （侧重整体，无一例外。）‎ ‎◎each可作形容词及代词，而every只能作形容词，但可与-one，-body，-thing等构成复合代词。‎ ‎◎each用在代词或复数名词前要用介词of连接，如each of them, each of the boys; every不能直接跟of连接，如不可以说every of them，而要说every one of them或each of them。‎ ‎◎every还可以表示“每隔”，后接基数词加名词，如every four weeks, every three months等，此种结构中的every不能用each代替。‎ She had a rest every fives minutes. 她每隔5分钟就休息一会儿。‎ 魔力纠错 ‎①街道两旁有许多商店。‎ 误：There are many shops on every side of the street.‎ 正：There are many shops on each side of the street.‎ 魔力解析 each可以用来指两个或两个以上的人或物，但是every却总是指三个或三个以上的人或物，不能指两者。‎ ‎6. Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. (P62)我不仅对帮助别人感到很满足，而且我还渐渐地花时间做自己喜爱做的事情。‎ ‎(1)not only ... but also (also可省略)是“不但……而且……”的意思，当置于句首时，not only后面从句的主谓要倒装，但but （also）后面的主谓不用倒装。‎ Not only has he been to Canada, but (also) he knows some Canadians.‎ 他不仅去过加拿大，而且还认识许多加拿大人。‎ Not only did he teach at school, but (also) he wrote novels.‎ 他不仅在学校里教书，而且还写小说。‎ ‎7. “Don’t put it off,” says HuiPing. “Become a volunteer today!” (P62) “别犹豫”，慧萍说，“今天就来当一名自愿者吧！”‎ ‎(1)put off 意思是“推迟，拖延”。‎ Never put off till tomorrow what may be done today. 今日事今日毕。‎ They put off the soccer game because of the rain. ‎ 因为下雨，他们把球赛推迟了。‎ You should not put off going to see the doctor. 你不应该拖延去看医生。‎ ‎◎put off还可意为“关掉”，相当于turn off。‎ Please put off the lights before you leave the classroom.‎ 在你离开教室之前，请关掉灯。‎ ‎(2)become是系动词，表示“变成，成为”，后面接名词、形容词、过去分词等。‎ She became famous in her city. 她在她所在城市的成为名人了。‎ 知识拓展 become后可接介词of，构成what becomes of sb/sth 表示“某人/某事进展如何”。‎ What became of the dreams of our youth? 我们年轻时的理想何在？‎ 特别提示 系动词get, turn , grow和become都可表示“变得，感到”，其区别是：‎ ‎◎get用于日常用语，后面常跟比较级。‎ The weather gets colder, and the days get shorter. 天气变冷了，白天变短了。 ‎ ‎◎turn指在颜色和性质等方面变得与原来不同。‎ His face turned red. 他的脸变红了。‎ ‎◎grow着重变化过程。‎ It’s growing dark. 天渐渐地变黑了。‎ ‎◎become是指身份、职位的变化，作瞬间动词时，指状态的变化。‎ He became an artist. 他成为了一名艺术家。‎ ‎8. Jimmy takes after his mother. (P63)吉米的言行举止像他妈妈。‎ 本句中的take after sb 表示“长相或举止像（某个长辈）”，不能用于被动语态。‎ To my surprise, Jack doesn’t take after his father at all.‎ 令我惊奇的是，杰克和他爸爸长的一点儿也不像。‎ Mary really takes after her mother, she has the same eyes, nose, and hair. ‎ 玛丽长得真像她妈妈，眼睛、鼻子和头发一个样。‎ ‎9. Jimmy has run out of money. (P63)吉米把钱花光了。‎ run out of意为“用完”，其主语通常是人，表示主动含义，后面跟宾语。‎ He has run out of ink.他用完了墨水。‎ I’m afraid we’re run out of petrol.我们的汽油怕是已用完了。‎ 特别提示 run out也是“用完”的意思，其主语通常是被使用的事物，如时间、金钱、食物等，但不用于被动语态，同时其后也不能跟宾语。‎ His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花完了。‎ Have you nearly finished? Time is running out. 你快做完了吗？时间快到了。‎ ‎10. I fix up bikes and give them away. (P63)我修理好自行车，然后捐赠出去。‎ ‎(1)fix up相当于to repair，表示“修理，修补，整理”,其后跟物件名词作宾语。‎ My watch sometimes gains and sometimes loses. Can you fix it up for me? ‎ 我的表有时快，有时慢，你能帮我修修吗？‎ My mother is too old to live on her own, so we’re fixing up the spare room for her. 我母亲年龄太大了，不能自己生活，所以我们正收拾这个多出的房间让她住。‎ 特别提示 如果fix up的宾语是“人”的话，则构成fix sb up with sth句型，表示“为某人安排某件事，向某人提供某物”。‎ I’ll fix you up with a place to stay. 我来给你安排住处。‎ ‎(2)give sth away 意思是“捐赠，赠送”。‎ The rich man gave away most of his money to charity.‎ 那个富人把他的大部分钱都捐给了慈善事业。‎ 知识拓展 ‎◎give away还可以表示“分发或赠与某物，由于大意而未利用或抓住（时机，机会等）”。‎ The headmaster gave away the prizes at the school sports day.‎ 校长在学校运动会上颁发了奖品。‎ ‎◎give away还可以表示“有意或无意地泄露某事情或出卖某人”。‎ The woman gave away state secrets to the enemy.‎ 那个妇女把国家机密泄露给了敌人。‎ ‎11. He even handed out advertisements at a local supermarket. (P64)他甚至在当地的一家超市散发广告。‎ hand out意为“散发”，其中hand是动词。‎ The teacher is handing out the maths papers. 老师在发数学试卷。‎ 短语链语 hand in“面交”，“上交”。‎ The students are handing their papers in.学生们在交试卷。‎ ‎12. Then he told the teachers at school about his problem ... (P64)然后他告诉老师自己的问题……‎ tell sb about sth是“把某事告诉某人”的意思，有时表示“嘱咐或语气较轻的命令”，常用于tell sb to do sth结构。‎ The teacher told us about his story. 老师给我们讲了他的故事。‎ My mother usually tells me to be careful on my way to school.‎ 妈妈常常告诉我在去上学的路上一定要小心。‎ ‎13. The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. (P64)他想到的那些办法获得了成功。‎ ‎(1)这是一个由that引导的定语从句，先行词是前面的strategies。动词短语worked out在这里作主语the strategies的谓语，意为“产生结果，发展为，结果是……”，后面不可接宾语，主语也不用“人”来充当。‎ I wonder how their ideas worked out in practice. ‎ 我很想知道他们的想法在实践中取得了什么结果。‎ We didn’t plan it like that but it worked out very well.‎ 我们原不是那样计划的，但结果却很好。‎ 知识拓展 work out的其它用法 It was the best solution that he was able to work out at this time. ‎ 这是他这时能想出的最好的解决办法了。（想出）‎ I can’t work out the meaning of this poem. 我理解不了这首诗的意思。（理解）‎ 短语链语 ‎◎work on意为“从事”。‎ Professor Green is working on a new book. 格林教授正在写一本新书。‎ He is working on a maths problem. 他正在算一道数学难题。‎ ‎◎work on后面无宾语时，表示继续工作。‎ It’s very late, but they were still working on.‎ 时间很晚了，但他们仍然在继续工作。‎ ‎(2)fine在这里是副词，可与well替换，意思是“好，顺利”。‎ The machine works fine. 这台机器运行很好。‎ Sam is doing fine in his new business. ‎ 萨姆在他的新业务中一切进展顺利。‎ ‎14. ...Who has filled my life with pleasure. (P66)……使我生活充满快乐的人。‎ ‎(1)本句中的fill...with...表示一个动作，意为“用……装满……”，其主语通常是人。‎ He filled the bag with books. 他在书包里装满了书。‎ Please fill the bottle with milk. 请将瓶子装满牛奶。‎ 知识拓展 be filled with表示一个状态，意为“装满了……”，相当于be full of，其主语通常是人或物。‎ The room was filled with smoke. 房间里浓烟弥漫。‎ Her eyes were filled with tears. 她眼睛里充满了泪水。‎ ‎(2)pleasure意为“高兴，快乐”，是不可数名词；表示“乐趣，高兴的事”时是可数名词。‎ Reading gives me great pleasure. 读书给了我很多快乐。‎ It is one of my greatest pleasures. 它是我最大乐趣之一。‎ ‎◎在口语中It’s pleasure. 是回答感谢的客套语。 ‎ ‎—Thank you for your help. 感谢你的帮助。‎ ‎—It’s a pleasure. 不用谢。‎ 特别提示 ‎◎pleased是形容词，意为“自己感到高兴的，欣喜的，满意的”，指以任何方式表现出来或未表现出来的满足与快乐，在句中常用作表语，其主语为人。‎ The two friends were very pleased to see each other again. ‎ 这两个朋友非常高兴再次见面。‎ I was pleased that the manager had decided not to be angry with me. ‎ 使我高兴的是经理已经不再生我的气了。‎ ‎◎pleasant也是形容词，表示“使人感到愉快／满意”，一般用作定语，如主语是物，也可以用作表语。‎ It’s pleasant weather today. 今天的天气令人愉快。‎ It’s very pleasant to sit down after standing for hours.‎ 站了几小时后坐下来很舒服。‎ ‎◎please是动词，表示“（使）高兴，满意，愉快”。‎ Does the cloth please you? 这布料合你的意吗？‎ ‎15. Because I can’t use my arms or legs well, normal things like answering the telephone, opening and shutting doors, or carrying things have always been difficult for me. (P66)因为我不能灵活地使用我的手和脚，像接电话、开关门、拿东西这样的事情对于我来说都很难。‎ ‎(1)本句中的shut意为“关”，在许多情况下可以与close互换，只是后者语气较弱，如close the door关门（也可能指半开半闭），shut the door关门（指把门关紧）。‎ That shop shuts at eight pm. 那家商店八点钟关门。‎ He closed his speech with a funny joke. 他用一个有趣的笑话结束了演说。‎ ‎◎当表示“关闭公路，铁路或交通工具”或作“结束”讲时，只用close。‎ They have closed the road for thick fog. 由于大雾，那条公路被关闭。‎ 特别提示 turn off用来表示“关闭”有开关的东西，如收音机、电视、煤气、水龙头等。‎ Please turn off the light when you leave the lab. ‎ 在你离开实验室前关掉灯。‎ Make sure the gas is turned off before you go to bed. ‎ 确保上床前把煤气关掉。‎ ‎(2)本句中的carry意为“搬运，携带”，不表示带到什么地方，而携带的方式可以是提、扛、背、抱、抬等。‎ She carried a baby in her arms. 她怀里抱了一个孩子。‎ He was carrying a wooden box on his shoulder.他扛着一个木箱。‎ 特别提示 在后面“Lucky! Fetch my book.”一句中出现的fetch相当于go and bring back，意为“取来，接来”，表示一往一返。‎ Let’s fetch some water. 咱们去打点水来。‎ People had to walk many kilometers in order to fetch wood. ‎ 为了取木料，人们不得不走许多公里路。‎ Unit 9 When was it invented?‎ 重点、难点、考点及疑点注释 ‎1. They’re used for seeing in the dark. (P69)它们被用于在黑夜里观看。‎ be used for表示“被用来做……”，介词for表示目的和用途，后面接名词或动词-ing形式。‎ Wood can be used for making paper.木材可以被用来造纸。‎ 知识拓展 含有be used的常用短语：‎ ‎◎be used as表示“被用作……”，介词as意思是“作为”的意思，其后一般接名词，强调使用的工具及手段。‎ This book can be used as a textbook.这本书可以当作教科书来用。‎ ‎◎be used by表示“被……使用”，by后接动作的执行者。‎ This kind of machine is used by farmers for getting in crops.‎ 农民们用这种机器来收割庄稼。‎ ‎2. I think the most helpful invention is the light bulb. (P70)我认为最有用的发明是灯泡。‎ helpful是由名词help加上-ful后缀构成的形容词，意为“有帮助的”，类似的形容词还有：‎ thank—thankful (感谢的，感激的) grate—grateful(感谢的，感激的)‎ use—useful (有用的) wonder—wonderful(令人惊奇的)‎ forget—forgetful (健忘的) success—successful(成功的)‎ beauty—beautiful (美丽的) pain—painful(疼痛的)‎ ‎3. I’d like to have a radio because I could listen to music all day. (P70)我想有一个收音机，这样我就可以整天听音乐了。‎ 本句中的情态动词could用来表示逻辑上或理论上的可能性，而不是某种实际上将要发生或正在发生的可能性。‎ Anybody could make mistake.任何人都可能犯错误。‎ The weather here could be very cold in winter. 冬天这儿的天气很冷。‎ 特别提示 could也表示人或动物的内在能力，有某种知识或者技能而能够做某事。‎ He hurt his foot and couldn’t play soccer. 他的脚受了伤，所以他不能踢足球了。‎ ‎4. The potato chips were invented by mistake. (P71)土豆条的发明纯属歪打正着。‎ ‎(1) potato chips是一个复合名词，其中第一个名词用作定语修饰后一个名词，这样的例子有很多，又如: alarm clock, telephone number等。‎ 知识拓展 复合名词变复数的规则，你一定要牢记啊！‎ ‎◎通常只把主体名词变为复数 school boy—school boys(男生) apple tree—apple trees(苹果树) ‎ vegetable sandwich—vegetable sandwiches(蔬菜三明治) ‎ girl friend—girl friends（女朋友）‎ ‎◎如果没有主体名词，在最后一个名词上用复数。‎ good-for-nothing—good-for-nothings（饭桶、无用的人）‎ three-year-old—three-year-olds（三岁的孩子）‎ ‎◎由man, woman和另外一个名词构成的复合名词，两个部分都要用复数。‎ man teacher—men teachers(男教师)‎ gentleman farmer—gentlemen farmers （乡绅）‎ ‎(2)by mistake 表示“错误地（因粗心、遗忘等所致）”。‎ Sorry, I took your bag by mistake. 对不起，我错拿了你的手提包。‎ 短语链语 mistake ... for “错把……当作……”‎ ‎5. George Crum cooked them for a long time until they were crispy. (P71)George Crum将它们做了很长时间，直到它们变脆了。‎ until常用作介词或连词，用来引导介词短语或从句在句子中作时间状语。‎ ‎◎在肯定句中，until与延续性、持续性动词连用，表示“直到……为止”。‎ I worked until late in the afternoon. 我一直干到下午很晚的时候。‎ ‎◎在否定句中，until常与瞬间动词、短暂性动词连用，表示“直到……‎ 才……”，“不到……不……”。‎ The rain didn’t stop until midnight. 雨直到半夜才停。‎ I won’t leave until you promise to help me. 你不答应帮助我，我不会离开。‎ ‎6. And he sprinkled lots of salt on them so they were salty. (P71) 然后，他在上面撒很多盐，这样它们就咸了。‎ ‎(1)sprinkle 是“撒、洒”的意思，常构成sprinkle A on/over B 或sprinkle B with A表示“撒(某物)于(某物的表面)”。‎ She sprinkled sand along the icy path. 她往结冰的路上撒了些沙子。‎ He sprinkled vinegar on his fish and chips. 他往鱼和土豆上洒了些醋。‎ ‎(2)salt是不可数名词，其形容词是salty。在英语中，很多名词后加-y可以构成形容词，表示“充满/包含……”，其意思与原来词汇的意思相同，只是词性不同，如cloud—cloudy, hair—hairy, rose—rosy, sleep—sleepy等。‎ ‎7. Some leaves from a nearby bush fell into the water and remained there for some time. (P72)附近丛林里的一些树叶掉进了水里，并留在那里很长时间。‎ ‎(1) fall into在这里是“落入、陷入”的意思。 ‎ Some ash fell into my cup. 一些灰掉进我的杯子里了。‎ A ripe fruit happened to fall into his hand. 一个熟了的果子碰巧掉在他手里。‎ ‎(2)fall into有时也可以作“开始”解。‎ He fell into conversation with me. 他开始和我谈起话来。‎ ‎(3)remain 表示“继续、依然、停留”，后面接名词，动词不定式。‎ He remained a prisoner for the rest of his life. 他的余生都在牢中度过。‎ It sounds a good idea, but it remains to be seen whether it will succeed.听起来这是个好注意，可是它能否成功，要等以后才能知晓。‎ ‎(4)remain后面也可以接副词或介词短语。‎ She remains in the house all these days. 她这些天一直呆在那栋房子里。‎ Three out of four of them remained single. 他们四个人中有三个人还是单身。‎ 特别提示 remain还有“剩下、残余”的意思。‎ I can’t go to the cinema because I have a lot of homework remained undone.‎ 我不能去看电影，因为我还有很多作业未做。‎ ‎8. And in this way, one of the world’s favorite drinks was invented. (P72)就这样，世界上最受欢迎的一种饮料产生了。‎ 本句中的in the way意为“就这样”，“以这种方式”。‎ The song was composed in this way. 这首歌就这样被创作出来了。‎ In this way, you will find the answer to this question. ‎ 用这种方法，你可以找到这个问题的答案。‎ 知识拓展 way主要有以下几种用法：‎ ‎◎表示“方法”，接不定式，...way to do sth这一结构等于...way of doing sth。‎ Scientists are trying to find ways to prevent(of preventing) disease.‎ 科学家们正在寻找预防疾病的方法。‎ There are many ways of traveling(to travel), for example, by air.‎ 旅行有许多方式，例如乘飞机。‎ ‎◎表示“路途”，“路线”，常构成on one’s/the way to...“在……的途中”。在这一结构中，介词to表示方向，后接名词。如果后面接地点副词如here, there, home时则不用to。‎ I’m on my way home.我正在回家的路上。‎ She’s on her way to see the film.她正在去看电影的路上。‎ ‎◎表示“方向”。‎ Look this way.看这边。‎ Go that way.往那边走。‎ ‎◎表示“距离”，“路程”。 ‎ Beijing is a long way from here.北京离这里很远。‎ ‎9. Dr Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams, and taught them how to play his new game. (P74)奈斯密斯医生把他的学生分成两组，并教他们如何玩他的新游戏。‎ 本句中的divide...into是动介短语，与separate...into同义，意为“把……划分成”，其中divide是及物动词。 ‎ My father divided the cake into four pieces. 我爸爸把蛋糕分成4块。‎ We divided ourselves into small groups to carry out the plan.‎ 我们分成几个小组来执行这个计划。‎ ‎10. It is believed that on December 21st, 1891, the first basketball game in history was played. (P74)人们认为1891年12月21日是历史上的第一次篮球比赛的日子。‎ ‎(1)本句中的It is believed that... 相当于people believe that...是“人们相信/认为”的意思，that引导的是主语从句。‎ It is believed that by the year 2010, the population of the world will be seven billion.‎ ‎=People believe that by the year 2010, the population of the world will be seven billion.人们都认为到2010年，世界人口将达到七十亿。‎ ‎(2)believe意为“相信”，“认为”，一般表示相信某人是诚实的或某事是真实的，后面可以接名词、代词、从句或复合结构作宾语。‎ I just could not believe my eyes. 我简直不敢相信我的眼睛。‎ Scientists believe that whales can live for twenty to thirty years.‎ 科学家们认为鲸可以活二十到三十年。‎ ‎◎believe可以用于被动语态。‎ They are believed to have discussed this problem.据说，这个他们已经讨论过了。‎ 特别提示 believe与believe in的含义不同。‎ ‎◎believe in意为“信奉、信仰”，后面常接表示真理或宗教一类的名词，也可作“信任、信赖”解。‎ My grandpa believes in Buddhism. 我爷爷信奉佛教。‎ I can’t believe in his honesty. 我不相信他诚实